CSC-101 Line Protection IED Technical Application Manual - V1.01

CSC-101
Line Protection IED

Technical Application Manual
Version：V1.01
Doc. Code：0SF.451.082(E)
Issued Date：2012.8
Copyright owner: Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd
Note: the company keeps the right to perfect the instruction. If equipment
does not agree with the instruction at anywhere, please contact our company
in time. We will provide you with corresponding service.
®
is registered trademark of Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.
We reserve all rights to this document, even in the event that a patent is issued and a different
commercial proprietary right is registered. Improper use, in particular reproduction and
dissemination to third parties, is not permitted.
This document has been carefully checked. If the user nevertheless detects any errors, he is
asked to notify us as soon as possible.
The data contained in this manual is intended solely for the product description and is not to be
deemed to be a statement of guaranteed properties. In the interests of our customers, we
constantly seek to ensure that our products are developed to the latest technological
standards as a result; it is possible that there may be some differences between the
hardware/software product and this information product.
Manufacturer:
Beijing Sifang Automation Co., Ltd.
Tel: +86-10-62961515
Fax: +86-10-62981900
Internet: http://www.sf-auto.com
Add: No.9, Shangdi 4th Street, Haidian District, Beijing, P.R.C.100085
Preface
Purpose of this manual
This manual describes the functions, operation, installation, and placing into service
of device CSC-101. In particular, one will find:
 Information on how to configure the device scope and a description of the device
functions and setting options;
 Instructions for mounting and commissioning;
 Compilation of the technical specifications;
 A compilation of the most significant data for experienced users in the Appendix.
Target Audience
Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with

adjustment, checking, and service of selective protective equipment, automatic and
control facilities, and personnel of electrical facilities and power plants.
Applicability of this Manual
This manual is valid for SIFANG Distance Protection IED CSC-101; firmware version
V1.00 and higher
Indication of Conformity
Additional Support
In case of further questions concerning IED CSC-101 system, please contact

SIFANG representative.
Safety information
Strictly follow the company and international safety regulations.

Working in a high voltage environment requires serious approch to
aviod human injuries and damage to equipment
Do not touch any circuitry during operation. Potentially lethal
voltages and currents are present
Avoid to touching the circuitry when covers are removed. The IED
contains electirc circuits which can be damaged if exposed to static
electricity. Lethal high voltage circuits are also exposed when covers
are removed
Using the isolated test pins when measuring signals in open circuitry.
Potentially lethal voltages and currents are present
Never connect or disconnect wire and/or connector to or from IED

during normal operation. Dangerous voltages and currents are
present. Operation may be interrupted and IED and measuring
circuitry may be damaged
Always connect the IED to protective earth regardless of the

operating conditions. Operating the IED without proper earthing may
damage both IED and measuring circuitry and may cause injuries in
case of an accident.
Do not disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer

without short-circuiting the transformer’s secondary winding.
Operating a current transformer with the secondary winding open will
cause a high voltage that may damage the transformer and may
cause injuries to humans.
Do not remove the screw from a powered IED or from an IED

connected to power circuitry. Potentially lethal voltages and currents
are present
Using the certified conductive bags to transport PCBs (modules).

Handling modules with a conductive wrist strap connected to
protective earth and on an antistatic surface. Electrostatic discharge
may cause damage to the module due to electronic circuits are
sensitive to this phenomenon
Do not connect live wires to the IED, internal circuitry may be
damaged
When replacing modules using a conductive wrist strap connected to

protective earth. Electrostatic discharge may damage the modules
and IED circuitry
When installing and commissioning, take care to avoid electrical

shock if accessing wiring and connection IEDs
Changing the setting value group will inevitably change the IEDs
operation. Be careful and check regulations before making the
change
Contents
Chapter 1 Introduction ................................................................................................................. 1
1 Overview ................................................................................................................................... 2
2 Features .................................................................................................................................... 3
3 Functions ................................................................................................................................... 6
3.1 Protection functions..................................................................................................... 6
3.2 Monitoring functions ................................................................................................... 7
3.3 Station communication ................................................................................................ 7
3.4 Remote communication ............................................................................................... 8
3.5 IED software tools ....................................................................................................... 8
Chapter 2 General IED application .............................................................................................11
1 Display information ................................................................................................................ 12
1.1 LCD screen display function ..................................................................................... 12
1.2 Analog display function ............................................................................................ 12
1.3 Report display function ............................................................................................. 12
1.4 Menu dispaly function ............................................................................................... 12
2 Report record .......................................................................................................................... 13
3 Disturbance recorder ............................................................................................................. 14
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 14
3.2 Setting........................................................................................................................ 14
4 Self supervision function ....................................................................................................... 16
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 16
4.2 Self supervision principle .......................................................................................... 16
4.3 Self supervision report............................................................................................... 16
5 Time synchronization............................................................................................................. 18
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 18
5.2 Synchronization principle.......................................................................................... 18
5.2.1 Synchronization from IRIG ....................................................................................... 19
5.2.2 Synchronization via PPS or PPM .............................................................................. 19
5.2.3 Synchronization via SNTP ........................................................................................ 19
6 Setting ...................................................................................................................................... 20
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 20
6.2 Operation principle .................................................................................................... 20
7 Authorization ........................................................................................................................... 21
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 21
Chapter 3 Basic protection elements .......................................................................................... 23
1 Startup element ...................................................................................................................... 24
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 24
1.2 Sudden-change current startup element..................................................................... 24
1.3 Zero-sequence current startup element ...................................................................... 25
1.4 Overcurrent startup element ...................................................................................... 26
1.5 Low-voltage startup element (for weak infeed systems) ........................................... 27
1.6 Steady state consistence loosing startup .................................................................... 27
2 Phase selector ........................................................................................................................ 29
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 29
2.2 Sudden-change current phase selector ....................................................................... 29
2.3 Symmetric component phase selector ....................................................................... 30
2.4 Low-voltage phase selector ....................................................................................... 31
3 Directional elements .............................................................................................................. 33
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 33
3.2 Memory voltage directional element ......................................................................... 33
3.3 Zero sequence component directional element.......................................................... 33
3.4 Negative sequence component directional element ................................................... 34
3.5 Impedance directional elements ................................................................................ 35
4 Setting parameters................................................................................................................. 37
4.1 Setting list .................................................................................................................. 37
4.2 Setting explanation .................................................................................................... 37
Chapter 4 Distance protection .................................................................................................... 39
1 Distance protection ................................................................................................................ 40
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 40
1.2 Protection principle ................................................................................................... 40
1.2.1 Full scheme protection ................................................................................... 40
1.2.2 Impedance characteristic ............................................................................... 41
1.2.3 Extended polygonal distance protection zone characteristic.................... 42
1.2.4 Minimum operating current ............................................................................ 44
1.2.5 Measuring principle ......................................................................................... 44
1.2.6 Distance element direction determination ................................................... 47
1.2.7 Power swing blocking ..................................................................................... 48
1.2.8 Phase-to-earth fault determination ............................................................... 57
1.2.9 Logic diagram .................................................................................................. 57
1.3 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 63
1.4 Setting parameters ..................................................................................................... 64
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 64
1.4.2 Setting explanation ......................................................................................... 69
1.4.3 Calculation example for distance parameter settings ................................ 70
1.5 Reports....................................................................................................................... 83
1.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 84
Chapter 5 Teleprotection ............................................................................................................ 87
1 Teleprotection schemes for distance ................................................................................... 88
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 88
1.2 Teleprotection principle............................................................................................. 88
1.2.1 Permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) scheme ................................ 88
1.2.2 Permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme .................................. 89
1.2.3 Blocking scheme ............................................................................................. 90
1.2.4 Additional teleprotection logics...................................................................... 92
1.3 Input and output signals............................................................................................. 93
1.4.1 Setting list ......................................................................................................... 95
1.4.2 Setting explanation ......................................................................................... 95
1.5 Reports ...................................................................................................................... 96
1.6 Technical data............................................................................................................ 96
2 Teleprotection for directional earth fault protection ........................................................... 97
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 97
2.2 Protection principle ................................................................................................... 97
2.3 Input and output signals ............................................................................................ 98
2.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 100
2.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 100
Chapter 6 Overcurrent protection ............................................................................................ 103
1 Overcurrent protection ........................................................................................................ 104
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 104
1.2 Protection principle ................................................................................................. 104
1.2.1 Measured quantities ..................................................................................... 104
1.2.2 Time characteristic ........................................................................................ 104
1.2.3 Direciton determination feature ................................................................... 106
1.2.4 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 107
1.3 Input and output signals .......................................................................................... 108
1.4 Setting parameters ................................................................................................... 109
1.4.1 Setting list ........................................................................................................110
1.5 Reports ..................................................................................................................... 111
1.6 Technical data........................................................................................................... 111
Chapter 7 Earth fault protection ................................................................................................115
1 Directional/Non-directional earth fault portection .............................................................116
1.1 Introduction ..............................................................................................................116
1.2 Protection principle ..................................................................................................116
1.2.1 Time delays characteristic ............................................................................117
1.2.2 Inrush restraint feature ..................................................................................118
1.2.3 Earth fault direction determination ...............................................................119
1.2.4 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 121
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 124
1.4.2 Setting calculation example ......................................................................... 127
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 127
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 128
Chapter 8 Emergency/backup overcurrent and earth fault protection ...................................... 131
1 Emergency/backup overcurrent protection ...................................................................... 132
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 132
1.2.1 Tripping time characteristic .......................................................................... 132
1.2.2 Inrush restraint feature ................................................................................. 133
1.2.3 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 134
1.3 Input and output signals........................................................................................... 134
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 135
1.5 Reports..................................................................................................................... 137
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 137
2 Emergency/backup earth fault protection ......................................................................... 139
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 139
2.2.1 Tripping time characteristic .......................................................................... 139
2.2.2 Inrush restraint feature ................................................................................. 140
2.2.3 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 141
2.4.1 Setting list ....................................................................................................... 142
2.5 IED report ................................................................................................................ 144
2.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 144
Chapter 9 Switch-Onto-Fault protection .................................................................................. 147
1 Switch-Onto-Fault protection .............................................................................................. 148
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 148
1.2 Function principle .................................................................................................... 148
1.2.1 Function description ...................................................................................... 148
1.2.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 149
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 151
1.4.2 Setting calculation example ......................................................................... 152
1.5 Reports..................................................................................................................... 152
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 153
Chapter 10 Overload protection ................................................................................................. 155
1 Overload protection ............................................................................................................. 156
1.1.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 156
1.3.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 157
1.4 Reports..................................................................................................................... 157
Chapter 11 Overvoltage protection ............................................................................................ 159
1 Overvoltage protection ........................................................................................................ 160
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 160
1.2.1 Phase to phase overvoltage protection ..................................................... 160
1.2.2 Phase to earth overvlotage protection ....................................................... 161
1.2.3 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 161
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 163
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 163
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 164
Chapter 12 Undervoltage protection .......................................................................................... 165
1 Undervoltage protection ...................................................................................................... 166
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 166
1.2.1 Phase to phase underovltage protection ................................................... 166
1.2.2 Phase to earth undervoltage protection..................................................... 167
1.2.3 Depending on the VT location ..................................................................... 167
1.2.4 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 168
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 171
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 172
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 172
Chapter 13 Circuit breaker failure protection ............................................................................ 175
1 Circuit breaker failure protection........................................................................................ 176
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 176
1.2 Function Description ............................................................................................... 177
1.2.1 Current criterion evaluation ......................................................................... 178
1.2.2 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation .............................................. 179
1.2.3 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 180
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 185
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 186
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 187
Chapter 14 Dead zone protection ............................................................................................... 189
1 Dead zone protection .......................................................................................................... 190
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 190
1.2.1 Function description...................................................................................... 191
1.2.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 191
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 193
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 194
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 194
Chapter 15 STUB protection...................................................................................................... 195
1 STUB protection ................................................................................................................... 196
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 196
1.2.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 197
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 198
1.5 Reports..................................................................................................................... 199
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 199
Chapter 16 Poles discordance protection ................................................................................... 201
1 Poles discordance protection ............................................................................................. 202
1.1 Introdcution ............................................................................................................. 202
1.2.2 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 203
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 205
1.5 Reports..................................................................................................................... 205
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 206
Chapter 17 Synchro-check and energizing check function ........................................................ 207
1 Synchro-check and energizing check function ................................................................ 208
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 208
1.2.1 Synchro-check mode .................................................................................... 208
1.2.2 Energizing ckeck mode ................................................................................ 209
1.2.3 Override mode ............................................................................................... 210
1.2.4 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 210
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 212
1.4.2 Setting explanation ....................................................................................... 213
1.5 Reports..................................................................................................................... 213
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 214
Chapter 18 Auto-reclosing function ........................................................................................... 217
1 Auto-reclosing ....................................................................................................................... 218
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 218
1.2.1 Single-shot reclosing .................................................................................... 218
1.2.2 Multi-shot reclosing ....................................................................................... 220
1.2.3 Auto-reclosing operation mode ................................................................... 222
1.2.4 Auto-reclosing initiation ................................................................................ 223
1.2.5 Cooperating with external protection IED .................................................. 224
1.2.6 Auto-reclosing logic....................................................................................... 225
1.2.7 AR blocked conditions .................................................................................. 227
1.2.8 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 228
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 232
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 234
1.6 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 234
Chapter 19 Secondary system supervision................................................................................. 237
1 Current circuit supervision .................................................................................................. 238
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 238
1.2 Function diagram..................................................................................................... 238
1.4.1 Setting lists ..................................................................................................... 239
1.4.2 Setting explanation ....................................................................................... 239
1.5 Reports .................................................................................................................... 239
2 Fuse failure supervision ...................................................................................................... 240
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 240
2.2 Function principle.................................................................................................... 240
2.2.1 Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail .......................................................... 240
2.2.2 Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail ................................................ 241
2.2.3 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 241
2.4.1 Setting list ....................................................................................................... 243
2.5 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 244
Chapter 20 Monitoring ............................................................................................................... 245
1 Check Phase-sequence for voltage and current ............................................................. 246
1.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 246
2 Check 3I0 polarity ................................................................................................................ 246
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 246
3 Check the third harmonic of voltage ................................................................................. 246
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 246
4 Check auxiliary contact of circuit breaker......................................................................... 246
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 246
5 Broken conductor ................................................................................................................. 247
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 247
5.1.1 Logic diagram ................................................................................................ 247
5.3.1 Setting list ....................................................................................................... 248
5.4 Reports .................................................................................................................... 249
6 Fault locator .......................................................................................................................... 249
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 249
Chapter 21 Station communication ............................................................................................ 253
1 Overview................................................................................................................................ 254
2 Protocol.................................................................................................................................. 254
2.1 IEC61850-8 communication protocol ..................................................................... 254
2.2 IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol .............................................................. 254
3 Communication port............................................................................................................. 255
3.1 Front communication port ....................................................................................... 255
3.2 RS485 communication ports ................................................................................... 255
3.3 Ethernet communication ports ................................................................................. 255
4 Typical communication scheme ......................................................................................... 255
4.1 Typical substation communication scheme ............................................................. 255
4.2 Typical time synchronizing scheme ........................................................................ 256
5 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 257
5.2 RS485 communication port ..................................................................................... 257
5.3 Ethernet communication port .................................................................................. 257
5.4 Time synchronization .............................................................................................. 258
Chapter 22 Remote communication ........................................................................................... 259
1 Binary signal transfer ........................................................................................................... 260
2 Remote communication channel ....................................................................................... 260
2.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 260
3 Technical data ....................................................................................................................... 262
3.1 Fiber optic communication ports ............................................................................. 262
Chapter 23 Hardware ................................................................................................................. 265
1 Introduction ........................................................................................................................... 266
1.1 IED structure ........................................................................................................... 266
1.2 IED appearance ....................................................................................................... 266
1.3 IED module arrangement ........................................................................................ 267
1.4 The rear view of the protection IED ........................................................................ 267
2 Local human-machine interface......................................................................................... 268
2.1 Human machine interface ........................................................................................ 268
2.2 LCD ......................................................................................................................... 269
2.3 Keypad..................................................................................................................... 269
2.4 Shortcut keys and functional keys ........................................................................... 270
2.5 LED ......................................................................................................................... 271
3 Analog input module ............................................................................................................ 273
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 273
3.2 Terminals of Analogue Input Module (AIM) .......................................................... 273
3.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 274
3.3.1 Internal current transformer ......................................................................... 274
3.3.2 Internal voltage transformer ......................................................................... 275
4 CPU module.......................................................................................................................... 276
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 276
4.2 Communication ports of CPU module (CPU) ......................................................... 276
5 Communication module ...................................................................................................... 278
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 278
5.2 Substaion communication port ................................................................................ 278
5.2.1 RS232 communication ports ....................................................................... 278
5.2.2 RS485 communication ports ....................................................................... 278
5.2.3 Ethernet communication ports .................................................................... 278
5.2.4 Time synchronization port ............................................................................ 279
5.3 Terminals of Communication Module .................................................................... 279
5.4 Operating reports ..................................................................................................... 280
5.5 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 280
5.5.1 Front communication port ............................................................................ 280
5.5.2 RS485 communication port ......................................................................... 281
5.5.3 Ethernet communication port ...................................................................... 281
5.5.4 Time synchronization .................................................................................... 282
6 Binary input module ............................................................................................................. 283
6.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 283
6.2 Terminals of Binary Input Module (BIM)............................................................... 283
6.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 285
7 Binary output module .......................................................................................................... 286
7.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 286
7.2 Terminals of Binary Output Module (BOM) .......................................................... 286
7.2.1 Binary Output Module A ............................................................................... 286
7.2.2 Binary Output Module C ............................................................................... 289
7.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 290
8 Power supply module .......................................................................................................... 292
8.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................. 292
8.2 Terminals of Power Supply Module (PSM) ............................................................ 292
8.3 Technical data.......................................................................................................... 294
9 Techinical data ..................................................................................................................... 295
9.1 Basic data ................................................................................................................ 295
9.1.1 Frequency ...................................................................................................... 295
9.1.2 Internal current transformer ......................................................................... 295
9.1.3 Internal voltage transformer......................................................................... 295
9.1.4 Auxiliary voltage ............................................................................................ 296
9.1.5 Binary inputs .................................................................................................. 296
9.1.6 Binary outputs ................................................................................................ 296
9.2 Type tests................................................................................................................. 297
9.2.1 Product safety-related tests ......................................................................... 297
9.2.2 Electromagnetic immunity tests .................................................................. 298
9.2.3 DC voltage interruption test ......................................................................... 300
9.2.4 Electromagnetic emission test .................................................................... 300
9.2.5 Mechanical tests............................................................................................ 301
9.2.6 Climatic tests.................................................................................................. 301
9.2.7 CE Certificate ................................................................................................. 302
9.3 IED design ............................................................................................................... 302
Chapter 24 Appendix ................................................................................................................. 303
1 General setting list ............................................................................................................... 304
1.1 Function setting list ................................................................................................. 304
1.2 Binary setting list ..................................................................................................... 313
2 General report list................................................................................................................. 321
3 Typical connection ............................................................................................................... 328
4 Glossary ................................................................................................................................ 331
5 CT requirement..................................................................................................................... 336
5.1 Overview ................................................................................................................. 336
5.2 Current transformer classification ........................................................................... 336
5.3 Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as defined)...................................... 337
5.4 General current transformer requirements ............................................................... 338
5.4.1 Protective checking current ......................................................................... 338
5.4.2 CT class .......................................................................................................... 339
5.4.3 Accuracy class ............................................................................................... 341
5.4.4 Ratio of CT ..................................................................................................... 341
5.4.5 Rated secondary current .............................................................................. 341
5.4.6 Secondary burden ......................................................................................... 341
5.5 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements ...................................................... 342
5.5.1 Line differential protection ............................................................................ 342
5.5.2 Transformer differential protection .............................................................. 343
5.5.3 Busbar differential protection ....................................................................... 344
5.5.4 Distance protection ....................................................................................... 345
5.5.5 Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection .............. 346
5.5.6 Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault protection............... 347
Chapter 1 Introduction
About this chapter

This chapter gives an overview of SIFANG line Protection
IED.
1
1 Overview
CSC-101 comprehensive transmission line protection IED (Intelligent
Electronic Device) is used for protection and monitoring of overhead lines,
cables or combination of them. It is a proper solution for following
applications:
 Overhead lines and cables up to 1000kV voltage level
 All type of station arrangement, such as 1.5 breakers arrangement,

double bus arrangement, etc.
 Extremely long lines
 Short lines
 Heavily loaded lines
 Satisfy the requirement for single and /or three pole tripping
 Communication with station automation system
The IED provides a highly sensitive and reliable distance protection with
innovative and proven quadrilateral characteristic. In addition to
separated zone extension functionality, five distance zones have fully
independent measuring and setting values which gives high flexibility for
all types of lines and fault resistances. Many other functions are
integrated to provide a complete backup protection library.
The wide application flexibility makes the IED an excellent choice for both
new installations and retrofitting of the existing stations.
2
2 Features
 Protection and monitoring IED with extensive functional library, user
configuration possibility and expandable hardware design to meet special
user requirements
 Redundant A/D sampling channels and interlocked dual CPU modules

guarantee the high security and reliability of the IED
 Single and/or three phase tripping/reclosing
 High sensitive startup elements, which enhance the IED sensitivity in all
disturbance conditions and avoid mal-operation
 Current sudden-change startup element
 Zero sequence current startup element
 Over current startup element
 Undervoltage startup element for weak-infeed end of lines
 Three kinds of faulty phase selectors are combined to guarantee the

correction of phase selection:
 Current sudden-change phase selector
 Zero sequence and negative sequence phase selector
 Undervoltage phase selector
 Four kinds of directional elements cooperate each other so as to

determine the fault direction correctly and promptly:
 Memory voltage directional element
 Zero sequence component directional element
 Negative sequence component directional element
 Impedance directional element
 Full scheme phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth distance protection with

five quadrilateral protection zones and additional extension zone
characteristic (21, 21N)
 Power swing function (68)
 Proven and reliable principle of power swing logic
 Unblock elements during power swing
 All common types of tele-protection communication scheme (85)
 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (PUTT) scheme
3
 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) scheme
 Blocking scheme
 Inter-tripping scheme
 Particular logic for tele-protection communication scheme
 Current reversal
 Weak-infeed end
 Evolving fault logic
 Sequence tripping logic
 Contacts and/or up to two fiber optical ports can be used for

tele-protection communication scheme
 A complete protection functions library, include:
 Distance protection with quadrilateral characteristic (21,21N)
 Power swing function (68)
 Tele-protection communication scheme for distance protection

(85-21,21N)
 Tele-protection communication scheme with dedicated earth fault

protection (85-67N)
 Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 67)
 Earth fault protection (50N, 51N, 67N)
 Emergency/backup overcurrent protection (50, 51)
 Emergency/backup earth fault protection (50N, 51N)
 Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)
 Overload protection (50OL)
 Overvoltage protection (59)
 Undervoltage protection (27)
 Circuit breaker failure protection (50BF)
 Poles discordance protection (50PD)
 Dead zone protection (50SH-Z)
 STUB protection (50STUB)
 Synchro-check and energizing check (25)
 Auto-recloser function for single- and/or three-phase reclosing (79)
4
 Voltage transformer secondary circuit supervision (97FF)
 Current transformer secondary circuit supervision
 Self-supervision on all modules in the IED
 Complete IED information recording: tripping reports, alarm reports,

startup reports and general operation reports. Any kinds of reports can be
stored up to 1000 and be memorized even if power interruption occurs.
 Remote communication
 Tele-protection contacts for power line carrier protection interface
 Up to two fiber optical ports for remote communication applied to

protection function, like tele-protection
 Vast range fiber internal modem, applied single–mode optical fiber

cable
 External optical/electrical converter, which support communication

through SDH or PCM, for G.703 (64kbit/s) and G.703E1 (2048kbit/s)
 Up to three electric /optical Ethernet ports can be selected to

communicate with substation automation system by IEC61850 or
IEC60870-5-103 protocols
 Up to two electric RS-485 ports can be selected to communicate with

substation automation system by IEC60870-5-103 protocol
 Time synchronization via network(SNTP), pulse and IRIG-B mode
 Configurable LEDs (Light Emitting Diodes) and output relays satisfied

users’ requirement
 Versatile human-machine interface
 Multifunctional software tool CSmart for setting, monitoring, fault

recording analysis, configuration, etc.
5
3 Functions
3.1 Protection functions
IEC 61850 IEC 60617

Description ANSI Code Logical Node graphical
Name symbol
Distance protection
Distance protection 21, 21N PDIS Z<
Power-swing function 68 RPSB Zpsb
Tele-protection
Communication scheme for distance
85–21, 21N PSCH
protection
Communication scheme for earth fault
85–67N PSCH
protection
Current protection
3IINV>
Overcurrent protection 50, 51, 67 PTOC 3I >>
3I >>>
I0INV>
Earth fault protection 50N, 51N, 67N PEFM I0>>
I0>>>
Emergency/backup overcurrent 3IINV>
50, 51 PTOC
protection 3I >
Emergency/backup earth fault I0INV>
50N, 51N PTOC
protection I0 >
3I >HS
Switch-onto-fault protection 50HS PSOF
I0>HS
Overload protection 50OL PTOC 3I >OL
Voltage protection
3U>
Overvoltage protection 59 PTOV
3U>>
3U<
Undervoltage protection 27 PTUV
3U<<
Breaker protection and control function
3I> BF
Breaker failure protection 50BF RBRF
I0>BF
6
IEC 61850 IEC 60617

Description ANSI Code Logical Node graphical
Name symbol
I2>BF
Dead zone protection 50SH-Z
STUB protection 50STUB PTOC 3I>STUB

3I< PD
Poles discordance protection 50PD RPLD I0>PD
I2>PD
Synchro-check and energizing check 25 RSYN
Auto-recloser 79 RREC O→I
Single- and/or three-pole tripping 94-1/3 PTRC
Secondary system supervision
CT secondary circuit supervision
VT secondary circuit supervision 97FF
3.2 Monitoring functions
Description
Redundant A/D sampling data self-check
Phase-sequence of voltage and current supervision
3I0 polarity supervision
The third harmonic of voltage supervision
Synchro-check reference voltage supervision
Auxiliary contacts of circuit breaker supervision
Broken conductor check
Self-supervision
Logicality of setting self-check
Fault locator
Fault recorder
3.3 Station communication
7
Description
Front communication port
Isolated RS232 port
Rear communication port
0-2 isolated electrical RS485 communication ports
0-3 Ethernet electrical/optical communication ports
Time synchronization port
Communication protocols
IEC 61850 protocol
IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
3.4 Remote communication
Description
Communication port
Contact(s) interface for power line carrier
0– 2 fiber optical communication port(s)
Communication distance
Up to 100kM
Connection mode
Direction fiber cable connection
Digital communication network through converter
3.5 IED software tools
Functions
Reading measuring value
Reading IED report
Setting
IED testing
Disturbance recording analysis
8
Functions
IED configuration
Printing
9
10
Chapter 2 General IED application
About this chapter

This chapter describes the use of the included software
functions in the IED. The chapter discusses general
application possibilities.
.
11
1 Display information
1.1 LCD screen display function
The LCD screen displays measured analog, report ouputs and menu.
1.2 Analog display function
The analog display includes measured Ia, Ib, Ic, 3I0, IN, Ua, Ub, Uc, UX
1.3 Report display function
The report display includes tripping, alarm and operation recording.
1.4 Menu dispaly function
The menu dispaly includes main menu and debugging menu, see
Chapter 23 for detail.
12
2 Report record
The report record includes tripping, alarm and operation reports. See
Chapter 24 for detail.
13
3 Disturbance recorder
3.1 Introduction
To get fast, complete and reliable information about fault current, voltage,
binary signal and other disturbances in the power system is very
important. This is accomplished by the disturbance recorder function and
facilitates a better understanding of the behavior of the power system and
related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
An analysis of the recorded data provides valuable information that can
be used to explain a disturbance, basis for change of IED setting plan,
improvement of existing equipment etc.
The disturbance recorder, always included in the IED, acquires sampled

data from measured analogue quantities, calculated analogue quantity,
binary input and output signals.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on

the operation of protection functions. It can even record disturbances not
tripped by protection functions.
The disturbance recorder information is saved for each of the recorded

disturbances in the IED and the user may use the local human machine
interface or dedicated tool to get some general information about the
recordings. The disturbance recording information is included in the
disturbance recorder files. The information is also available on a station
bus according to IEC 61850 and IEC 60870-5-103.
Fault wave recorder with great capacity, can record full process of any
fault, and can save the corresponding records. Optional data format or
wave format is provided, and can be exported through serial port or
Ethernet port by COMTRADE format.
3.2 Setting
Abbr. Explanation Default Unit Min. Max.

Time setting for recording time
T_Pre Fault 0.05 s 0.05 0.3
before fault occurred
14

Time setting for recording time
T_Post Fault 1 s 0.50 4.50
after fault occurred
Sample rate for fault recording
DR_Sample Rate (0: 600 sample/cycle, 1:1200 0 0 1
sample/cycle)
15
4 Self supervision function
4.1 Introduction
The IED may test all hardware components itself, including loop out of
the relay coil. Watch can find whether or not the IED is in fault through
warning LED and warning characters which show in liquid crystal display
and display reports to tell fault type.
The method of fault elimination is replacing fault board or eliminating

external fault.
4.2 Self supervision principle
 Measuring the resistance between analog circuits and ground
 Measuring the output voltage in every class
 Checking the zero drift and scale
 Verifying alarm circuit
 Verifying binary input
 Checking actual live tripping including circuit breaker
 Checking the setting values and parameters
4.3 Self supervision report
Table 1 Self supervision report
Abbr.(LCD Display) Description

Sample Err AI sampling data error
Soft Version Err Soft Version error
EquipPara Err Equipment parameter error
ROM Verify Err CRC verification for ROM error
Setting Err Setting value error
16
Abbr.(LCD Display) Description

Set Group Err Pointer of setting group error
BO No Response Binary output (BO) no response
BO Breakdown Binary output (BO) breakdown
SRAM Check Err SRAM check error
FLASH Check Err FLASH check error
BI Config Err BI configuration error
BO Config Err BO configuration error
BI Comm Fail BI communication error
BO Comm Fail BO communication error
Test BO Un_reset Test BO unreset
BI Breakdown BI breakdown
DI Input Err BI input error
NO/NC Discord NO/NC discordance
BI Check Err BI check error
BI EEPROM Err BI EEPROM error
BO EEPROM Err BO EEPROM error
Sys Config Err System Configuration Error
Battery Off Battery Off
Meas Freq Alarm Measurement Frequency Alarm
Trip Fail Trip fail
PhA CB Open Err PhaseA CB position BI error
PhB CB Open Err PhaseB CB position BI error
PhC CB Open Err PhaseC CB position BI error
3Ph Seq Err Three phase sequence error
AI Channel Err AI channel error
3I0 Reverse 3I0 reverse
3I0 Imbalance 3I0 imbalance
17
5 Time synchronization
5.1 Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source

of absolute time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This
makes comparison of events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a
SA system possible.
5.2 Synchronization principle
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock,
and the time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is
normally called the clock accuracy and means how much the error
increases, i.e. how much the clock gains or loses time. A disciplined clock
is a clock that ―knows‖ its own faults and tries to compensate for them, i.e.
a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a

hierarchical structure. A module is synchronized from a higher level and
provides synchronization to lower levels.
18
A module is said to be synchronized when it periodically receives

synchronization messages from a higher level. As the level decreases,
the accuracy of the synchronization decreases as well. A module can
have several potential sources of synchronization, with different
maximum errors, which gives the module the possibility to choose the
source with the best quality, and to adjust its internal clock from this
source. The maximum error of a clock can be defined as a function of:
 The maximum error of the last used synchronization message
 The time since the last used synchronization message
 The rate accuracy of the internal clock in the module.
5.2.1 Synchronization from IRIG
The built in GPS clock module receives and decodes time information
from the global positioning system. The module is located on the
Communication Module (MASTER). The GPS interfaces to the IED
supply two possible synchronization methods, IRIGB and PPS (or PPM).
5.2.2 Synchronization via PPS or PPM
The IED accepts PPS or PPM to the GPS interfaces on the

Communication Module. These pulses can be generated from e.g.
station master clock. If the station master clock is not synchronized from
a world wide source, time will be a relative time valid for the substation.
Both positive and negative edges on the signal can be accepted. This
signal is also considered as a fine signal.
5.2.3 Synchronization via SNTP
SNTP provides a ―Ping-Pong‖ method of synchronization. A message is

sent from an IED to an SNTP-server, and the SNTP-server returns the
message after filling in a reception time and a transmission time. SNTP
operates via the normal Ethernet network that connects IEDs together in
an IEC61850 network. For SNTP to operate properly, there must be a
SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The SNTP
synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1ms accuracy for
binary inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.
19
6 Setting
6.1 Introduction
Settings are divided into separate lists according to different functions.

The printed setting sheet consists of two parts -setting list and
communication parameters.
6.2 Operation principle
The setting procedure can be ended at the time by the key ―SET‖ or
―QUIT‖. If the key ―SET‖ is pressed, the display shows the question
―choose setting zone‖. The range of setting zone is from 1 to 16. After
confirming with the setting zone-key ―SET‖, those new settings will be
valid. If key ―QUIT‖ is pressed instead, all modification which have been
changed will be ignored.
20
7 Authorization
7.1 Introduction
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED and the tools
that are accessing the IED are protected, subject of authorization
handling. The concept of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED
and the associated tools is based on the following facts:
 There are two types of points of access to the IED:
 local, through the local HMI
 remote, through the communication ports
 There are different levels (or types) of guest, super user and
protection engineer that can access or operate different areas of the
IED and tools functionality.
21
22
Chapter 3 Basic protection elements
Chapter 3 Basic protection

elements
About this chapter
This chapter describes basic protection elements including

startup elements, phase selectors and directional elements.
23
1 Startup element
1.1 Introduction
Startup elements are designed to detect a faulty condition in the power

system and initiate all necessary procedures for selective clearance of
the fault, e.g. determination of the faulted loop(s), delaying time starting
for different functions. IED startup can release DC power supply for
binary output contacts. Once startup element operates, it does not reset
until all abnormal conditions have reset.
Startup element includes:
 Current sudden-change startup element(abrupt current)
 Zero-sequence current startup element
 Over current startup element
 Low-voltage startup element in weak-source
 steady state consistence loosing startup
1.2 Sudden-change current startup element
Sudden-change current startup element is the main startup element that

can sensitively detect most of faults. Its criteria are as followings:
i  I _ abrupt
or
3i0  I _ abrupt
Equation 1
where
24
 Δi is the sudden-change value of phase current sample
  means AB,BC or CA, e.g. iAB= iA-iB
 Δ3i0 is sudden-change value of zero sequence current sample
 I_abrupt is the setting value of sudden-change current startup

element.
The sudden-change current startup operates when any phase-to-phase

current sudden-change Δi or zero-sequence sudden-change current
Δ3i0 continuously exceed the setting I_abrupt.
1.3 Zero-sequence current startup element
In addition to current sudden-change startup element, zero-sequence

current element has also been considered to improve required sensitivity
of the fault detection at faults with high resistance. As an auxiliary startup
element, it operates with a short time delay. Its criterion is as following:
3I0 > k×I0dz
Equation 2
Where
 3I0 is the trippled value of zero-sequence current
 k is internal coefficient
 I0dz is Min{3I0_Tele EF, 3I0_EF1, 3I0_EF2, 3I0_EF Inv, 3I0_Em/BU

EF, 3I0_Inv_Em/BU EF, 3I0_SOTF}
 3I0_Tele EF is setting value of teleprotection based on earth fault

protection
 3I0_EF1 is the setting value of definite time stage 1 of the earth fault
protection
 3I0_EF2 is the setting value of definite time stage 2 of the earth fault
protection
 3I0_EF Inv is the setting value of inverse time stage of the earth fault
protection
25
 3I0_Em/BU EF is the setting value of emergency/backup earth fault

protection
 3I0_Inv_Em/BU EF is the setting value of emergency/backup earth
fault protection
 3I0_SOTF is the zero-sequence current setting of SOTF protection
1.4 Overcurrent startup element
If overcurrent protection function is enabled, over current startup element

is also considered to improve fault detection sensitivity. Same as zero
sequence current startup and to get reliable action, overcurrent startup
operates with 30ms delay as an auxiliary startup element. Its criteria are
as follows:
Ia > k×Ioc
or
Ib > k×Ioc
or
Ic > k×Ioc
Equation 3
where
 Ia(b,c) is measured phase currents
 Ioc is min{ I_OC1, I_OC2, I_OC Inv, I_Em/BU OC, I_Inv_Em/BU OC,
I_STUB, I_SOTF }
 I_OC1 is the setting value of definite time stage 1 of the overcurrent

protection function.
 I_OC2 is the setting value of definite time stage 2 of the overcurrent

 I_OC Inv is the setting value of inverse time stage of the overcurrent
 I_Em/BU OC is the setting value of emergency/backup overcurrent

protection
26
 I_Inv_Em/BU OC is the setting value for inverse time stage of

emergency/backup overcurrent protection
 I_STUB is the setting value of STUB protection
 I_SOTF is the setting value of SOTF protection
1.5 Low-voltage startup element (for weak infeed

systems)
In conditions that one end of the protected line has a weak-source and
accordingly the fault sudden-change phase to phase current is too low to
startup the IED, low-voltage startup element can come into service to
startup the tele-protection communication scheme with weak-echo logic.
When IED receives signaIs from another side, its operation criteria are as
follows:
Upe < k×Upe_Secondary
or
Upp < k×Upp_Secondary
Equation 4
where:
 Upe is each phase-to-earth voltage
 Upp is each phase-to-phase volatge.
 U_Secondary is the system secondary rated voltage
1.6 Steady state consistence loosing startup
The operation criteria of steady state consistance loosing startup are (OR
logic) as followings:
 Ia > I_PSB, Ib > I_PSB, Ic > I_PSB, and the sudden-change current
27
startup element hasn't operated
 All the phase-to-phase impedance of AB, BC and CA are located in

zone 3 area, and the sudden-change current startup element hasn't
operated
If any of the conditions has continued for 30ms, steady state consistence
loosing startup will operated.
28
2 Phase selector
2.1 Introduction
To efficiently detect faulty phase(s), An integrated phase selector is used

for various fault types. By processing on the currents and voltages values,
IED detects whether a fault is single-phase or multiple-phase. Therefore,
selected phase(s) is (are) used to issue phase selective trip command.
Three types of phase selector are designed:
 Sudden-change current phase selector
 Fault current symmetric component (zero and negative sequence)

phase selector
 Low voltage phase selector
Current sudden-change phase selector routine operates immediately

after sudden-change current startup. In addition, symmetric component
phase selector is implemented. However, both current sudden-change
phase and symmetric component phase selector are not applicable for
weak-infeed sides. Therefore, low-voltage phase selector is employed in
this condition.
2.2 Sudden-change current phase selector
Current Sudden-change phase selector employs phase-to-phase

differential currents IAB, IBC and ICA (IXY=IX-IY). Faulty phases
can be determined by comparing the values of these differential current
toward each other.
Table 2 shows the relative value of the phase-to-phase differential current

IAB, IBC and ICA at the various fault types. In this table ―+‖ means
the larger value,―++‖ the largest one，and ―-‖ indicates the small one.
Therefore after any current sudden-change startup, the value of IAB,
IBC and ICA are sorted into three categories mentioned above.
Accordingly, 7 categories, each of them indicates one type of fault, may
happen. For example, if the values of IAB and ICA are large while
IBC is small (with regard to each other), IED will select fault type as
phase A fault. Nevertheless, if IAB is very large, while IBC and ICA
29
are small at the same time, IED will determine fault type as AB.
Table 2 Current sudden-change phase selection scheme
Phase
Selected
A B C AB BC CA ABC
I
IAB ＋＋ — ＋＋＋＋＋＋
IBC — ＋＋＋＋＋＋＋＋
ICA ＋ — ＋＋＋＋＋＋＋
2.3 Symmetric component phase selector
As mentioned before, IED additionally applys symmetric component

phase selector. This method mainly uses the angle between zero and
negative sequence components of the fault current. It also confirms the
seleted phases by calculating phase-phase impedances.
Theoretical analysis has demonstrated that the angle betweenzero and

negative sequence current components (  I 2   I 0 ) can be usded to
select faulty phases. This concept has been shown in Figure 1 and Table
3
30
I0a
0 0
+30 AN,BCN -30
ABN BCN
0 0
+90 -90
CN,ABN BN,CAN
0 0
+150 CAN -150
.
Figure 1 relation between angle of zero and negative sequence component for various
fault types
Table 3 Symmetric component phase selector scheme
mode Angle range Selected fault type

1 +30° to -30° A→G or BC→G
2 +90° to +30° AB→G
3 +150° to +90° C→G or AB→G
4 -150° to +150° CA→G
5 -90° to -150° B→G or CA→G
6 -30° to -90° BC→G
For example, if the angle between I2 and I0 is in the range of -30°to +30°
the fault type may be A-phase to ground or BC-phases to ground.
As indicated inTable 3, areas 2, 4 and 6 directly determines related fault

type, but areas 1, 3 and 5 indicate that two type of fault may happen. In
this case, the two fault types can be differentiated by phase-to-phase
impedance calculation. If the impedance is larger than specified value,
then phase-to-phase fault is impossible and single-phase to ground fault
will be confirmed. Otherwise phase-to-phase fault will be selected.
2.4 Low-voltage phase selector
In the case of weak-infeed source, two previous phase selector cannot

operate reliablly. Therefore low-voltage phase selector has been
31
considered in the weak-infeed sides. In this case the IED will monitor VT
Fail condition. When there is no problem with VT and IED receives
signaIs from another side, low-voltage phase selector can operate
according to the following criteria:
Upe < k×Upe_Secondary
or
Upp < k×Upp_Secondary
Equation 5
where:
 Upe and Upp are phase-to-earth and phase-to-phase volatges,

respectively.
 U_Secondary is the system secondary rated voltage
 k is the internal coefficient
32
3 Directional elements
3.1 Introduction
Four kinds of directional elements are employed for reliable

determination of various faults direction. The related protection modules,
such as distance protection, tele-protection, overcurrent and earth fault
protections, utilize the output of the directional elements as one of their
operating condition. All the following directional elements will cooperate
with the above protection functions.
3.2 Memory voltage directional element
The IED uses the memory voltage and fault current to determine the
direction of the fault. Therefore, transient voltage of short circuit
conditions won’t influence the direction detection. Additionally, it improves
the direction detection sensitivity for symmetrical or asymmetrical
close-in faults with extremely low voltage. But it should be noted that the
memory voltage cannot be effective for a long time. Therefore, the
following directional elements will work as supplement to detect direction
correctly.
3.3 Zero sequence component directional element
Zero-sequence directional element has efficient features in the solidly

grounded system. The directional characteristic only relates to zero
sequence impedance angle of the zero sequence network of power
system, regardless of the quantity of load current and/or fault resistance
throughout the fault. The characteristic of the zero sequence directional
is illustrated in Figure 2.
33
90°
3I 0
0°
3U 0_Ref
Angle_EF
Angle_Range
EF
Forward Bisector
-3 I 0
Figure 2 Characteristic of zero sequence directional element
where:
Angle_EF: The settable characteristic angle
Angle_Range EF: 80º
The angle of direction characteristic can be adjusted by Angle_EF setting

value to comply with different system condition. Fault direction is
detected as forward if -3i0 phasor is in shaded area of Figure 2.
3.4 Negative sequence component directional

element
Negative sequence directional element can make an accurate direction

discrimination in any asymmetric fault. The directional characteristic only
relates to negative sequence impedance angle of the negative sequence
network of power system, regardless the quantity of load current and/or
fault resistance throughout the fault. The characteristic of the negative
sequence directional element is illustrated in Figure 3.
34
3I2 90°
0°
3 U 2_ Ref
Angle_Neg
Angle_Range
Neg
Forward
-3 I 2 Bisector
Figure 3 Characteristic of negative sequence directional element
where:
Angle_Neg: The settable characteristic angle
Angle_Range Neg: 80º
The angle of direction characteristic can be adjusted by Angle_Neg

setting value to comply with different system condition. Fault direction is
detected as forward if -3i2 phasor is in shaded area of Figure 3.
3.5 Impedance directional elements
The characteristic of the impedance directional element (shown in Figure

4) is the same with the characteristic of distance protection.
35
X
X_Set
Forward
-n∙R_Set
R_Set
R
Reverse
-n∙X_Set
Figure 4 Impedance direction detectioncharacteristic element
where:
R_SET: The resistance setting value of relevant zone of distance protection
X_SET: The reactance setting of relevant zone of distance protection
n: Multiplier for reverse directional element, which makes the reverse

directional element more sensitive than forward one. For distance
protection, n should be selected as 1; for teleprotection, n should be
selected as 1.25.
36
4 Setting parameters
4.1 Setting list
Table 4 Basic protection element setting list
Default
Min. Max.
Setting Unit setting Description
(Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
(Ir:5A/1A)
Sudden-change
I_abrupt A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir current threshold of
startup element
T_Relay Reset s 0.5 10 1 The reset time of relay
Rated primary voltage
U_Primary kV 30 800 230
(phase to phase)
Rated secondary
U_Secondary V 100 120 100 voltage (phase to
phase)
CT_Primary kA 0.05 5 3 Rated primary current
Rated secondary
CT_Secondary A 1 5 1
current
4.2 Setting explanation
The setting values are all secondary values if there is no special note.
Impedance setting is set according to impedance of line.
In this manual, wherever zero-sequence current is refered, the meaning

is 3I0.
1) I_abrupt: 0.2In is commonly recommended.
In general, the primary value of settings ―I_abrupt‖ and I_PS‖ must be

consistent in both sides of the protected line. However, if the difference
between the sensitivity angles (of the too sides) is too large, the settings
of two sides may also be different.
2) ―I_PSB‖: shoule be set more than maximum load current.
37
3) Primary rated voltage: Is set according to the actual rated primary

voltage of VT in kV..
4) Primary rated current: Is set according to the rated primary current in

kA.
5) Secondary rated current: Can be set to 1A or 5A.
6) Secondary rated voltage: Can be set to 100V to 120V.
38
Chapter 4 Distance protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the protection principle, input and

output signals, parameter, IED report and technical data for
distance protection function.
39
1 Distance protection
1.1 Introduction
Transmission line distance protection covers five full scheme protection

zones in addition to one zone extension. The IED employes separated
measuring element for three single-phase fault loops and three phase to
phase fault loops for each individual zones.
Individual settable zones in resistance and reactance component give the

flexibility for useing on overhead lines and cables of different types and
lengths.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together

with a sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function
suitable in applications with single phase auto-reclosing. Figure 5
illustrates the different available zone characteristics.
X
Zone 5
Zone 4
Zone 3
Zone 2
Zone Ext.
Zone 1
Zone 4 Reverse
(optional)
Zone 5 Reverse
(optional)
Figure 5 Distance protection zone characteristics
1.2 Protection principle
1.2.1 Full scheme protection
40
The execution of the different fault loops are of full scheme type, which
means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase
faults for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 6 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic
five, impedance-measuring zones and zone extension.
L1-E L2-E L3-E L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 ZONE 1
L1-E L2-E L3-E L1-L2 L2-L3 L3-L1 EXTENDED

ZONE 1
Figure 6 Different measuring loops at phase-earth fault and phase-phase fault
Each distance protection zone performs like one independent distance

protection IED with six measuring elements.
1.2.2 Impedance characteristic
The IED utilizes quadrilateral characteristic as shown in Figure 7.
X_Zset
Φ_Ztop
Φ_Zleft
Φ_Zright
R_Zset R
Φ_Zbottom
41
Figure 7 Characteristics of distance protection
where:
R_Zset: R_ZnPP or R_ZnPE;
X_Zset: X_ZnPP or X_ZnPE;
R_ZnPP: Resistance reach setting for phase to phase fault. Subscript n

means the number of protection zone. Subscript PP means phase to
phase fault.
n: value range: 1, 1Ext, 2, 3, 4, 5.
R_ZnPE: Resistance reach setting for phase to earth fault. Subscript X

means the number of protection zone. Subscript PE means phase to
earth fault.
X_ZnPP: Reactance reach setting for phase to phase fault
X_ZnPE: Reactance reach setting for phase to earth fault
Φ_Ztop: The upper boundary angle of the characteristic in the first

quadrant is designed to avoid distance protection overreaching when a
close-in fault happens on the adjacent line
Φ_Zbottom: The bottom boundary angle of the characteristic in the fourth

quadrant improves the reliability of the IED to operate reliably for close-in
faults with arc resistance
Φ_Zright: The right boundary angle of characteristic in the first quadrant

is used to deal with load encroachment problems
Φ_Zleft: The left boundary angle of the characteristic in the second

quadrant considers the line impedance angle which generally is not
larger than 90°. Thus this angle guarantees the correct operation of the
IED.
1.2.3 Extended polygonal distance protection zone

characteristic
When a fault occurs on the piont of the protection relay installed, the
42
voltage can be zero, theoretically, at the point of the fault. Considering

the VT and other errors, when the polarity of the impedance
measurement does not reflect the true distance from the fault, two
incorrect cases may occur:
 The fault is near the bus and in the forward direction but measured
impedance is not within the forward quadrilateral characteristic.
 The fault is near the bus and in the reverse direction but measured
impedance is not within the reverse quarilateral characteristic
Using fault phase current and voltage only, resistance value can not
accurately determine whether fault occurs in the reverse direction or the
forward direction. To solve the problem, IED considers the small
rectangle near to origin to extend protection zones. Therefore, to
increase relay reliable operation in addition to the tripping characteristic
mentioned above, an extended zone area with a little rectangular
characteristic is involved. In this case, final direction is determined based
on both extended zone charachterisitc and the criteria mentioned in
Figure 8, including memory voltage direction element, the zero sequence
directional element, and the negative sequence direction element. In
other words, relay generates trip if both direction and extended zone
impedance confirm each other.
This rectangular area, which is called impedance-offset characteristic,

has been shown in Figure 8 which is added to the characteristic shown in
Figure 7.
XSet
ΦTop
ΦLeft
XOffset ΦRight
ΦBottom R
ROffset RSet
43
Figure 8 Extended polygonal distance protection zone characteristic
The rectangular offset characteristic (illustrated in Figure 8) is calculated

automatically according to the related distance zones settings.
where:
X Offset :Min{ X Set/2 , 0.5(when In=5A)/2.5 (when In=1A)}
R Offset: Min{ Max{ Min{ 8×XOffset , RSet/4 }, 2×XOffset } , RSet}
R_ZSet: R_ZnPP or R_ZnPE
X_ZSet: X_ZnPP or X_ZnPE
1.2.4 Minimum operating current
The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the

magnitudes of input currents fall below certain threshold values.
For both phase-to-earth loop and phase-to-phase loop, Ln is blocked if

ILn < 0.1In
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln.
1.2.5 Measuring principle
A separate measuring system has been provided for each of the six
possible impedance loops A-E, B-E, C-E, A-B, B-C, C-A. The impedance
calculation will be continued whether a fault has been detected.
Based on the following differential equations, measuring elements

calculates relevant loop impedances with real-time voltages and
currents.
Measuring of the single phase impedance for a single phase fault is as

follows:
d(Iφ  K X  3I0 )
U Φ  LΦ  R Φ  (IΦ  K r  3I0 )  : A, B, C
dt
44
Equation 6
Measuring of the phase-phase impedance for multi-phase faults is as

follows:
dI
U Φ  LΦ  R Φ  IΦ  : AB, BC, CA
dt
Equation 7
Where, Kx and Kr are residual compensation factors. Matching of the

earth to line impedance is an essential prerequisite for the accurate
measurement of the fault distance (distance protection, fault locator)
during earth faults. This compensation will be done by residual
compensation settings value:
Kx=(X0-X1)/3X1
Equation 8
and
Kr=(R0-R1)/3R1
Equation 9
Measuring resistance R and reactance X (ωL=2πfL) at IED location can

be obtained by solving above differential equations.
For example, solving above equations leads to the following relation for
phase-phase (A-B) short circuit which can be used to calculate the
phase-to-phase loop impedance.
45
Figure 9 Phase-phases (A-B) short circuit
IL1 ·ZL – IL2 ·ZL = UL1-E – UL2-E
Equation 10
With:
U, I the (complex) measured quantities and
Z = R + jX the (complex) line impedance
The line impedance is computed as:
U L1-E -U L2-E
ZL =
I L1 -I L2
Equation 11
In addition, solving differential equation for single phase (e.g. A-E)

results:
Figure 10 Single-phases (A-B) short circuit
RE X
U L1-E =I A   R L +JX L  -I E  ( R L  J E X L )  I A   R L +JX L  -I E  (K r R L  JK x X L )
RL XL
Equation 12
This can be used for resistance and reactance calculation by separating

it to real and imaginary parts.
The impedances of the unfaulted loops are also influenced by the

short-circuit currents and voltages in the short-circuited phases. For
example, during an A-E fault, the short-circuit current in phase L1 also
46
appears in the measuring loops A-B and C-A. The earth current is also
measured in loops B-E and C-E. In addition to the load currents which
may flow, the unfaulted loops will be affected by faulted loop current
which have nothing to do with the actual fault distance/impedance.
Effect in the unfaulted loops is usually larger than the short-circuit

impedance of the faulted loop, because the unfaulted loop only carries a
part of the fault current and always has a larger voltage than the faulted
loop. As mentioned before, after triggering impedance calculations by
any startup element, all impedance loops will be calculated by separated
(non-switch) measuring systems. First, the symmetric component phase
selector chooses the influenced loops, than the IED compare the
impedance of these loops to remove the unfaulted loops.
1.2.6 Distance element direction determination
Considering the VT and other errors, the polarity of the measured

impedance may not reflect the true distance from the fault. So, the IED
judges the fault direction through using integrated directional elements.
Using memory voltage to judge the direction of the distance protection is

an efficient method. Therefore, IED also uses the memory voltage and
fault current to determine the direction of the fault. Under normal
circumstances, using memory voltage to judge the direction of the fault
has merit, since the transient process has not been affected. But the
memory voltage can not be a long effective quantity. Therefore, IED
needs to rely on forward and reverse direction to expand the logic. IED
uses the direction of zero sequence and negative sequence directional
elemenst to supplement the direction of the distance protection.
Zero-sequence directional element has very good features in the neutral

grounding system. The directional characteristics only relates to zero
sequence impedance angle of the zero sequence network of back power
system which has large or small load current and/or fault resistance
effects. There is no memory voltage problem, and direction can be
reliably detected using zero-sequence directional element. For more
detail about zero sequence direction detection refer to Earth fault
protection.
Negative sequence directional element has very clear direction in any

asymmetric fault. The directional characteristics only relate to negative
sequence impedance angle of the negative sequence network of back
power system which has large or small load current and/or fault
47
resistance effects, etc. Like zero sequence, there is also no memory

voltage problem, and direction can be reliably detected in this case by
using negative sequence. For more detail refer the chapter earth fault
protection.
In summary, the distance protection has two essential conditions to

operate: corresponding direction detection element is satisfied and
calculated impedance is entered into the impedance characteristics zone.
The usage of direction elements is different for five zone characteristics:
 The first zone: it is used as fast zone commonly. Since high speed
and required selectivity are quite essential, requirements for the direction
component must be ―forward‖ direction.
 The extended first zone: it is different from the other five zones. It
doesn't work until the Auto-reclosing has been fully charged. It is a back
up of teleprotection.
 The second zone: it is used as time delay zone commonly.
Considering enough reliability, its direction criterion is ―not reverse‖
direction.
 The third zone: Generally, it is used as the last forward direction zone.
The delay time is longer. Its direction criterion is ―not reverse‖ direction.
The fourth zone: it is used as non-forward direction zone commonly, so
requirement for the direction component is ―not forward‖ direction.
 The fifth zone: like zone 4, if it is used as reverse direction, its
direction criterion is ―not forward‖ direction.
For three phase faults, direction checking is only determined by memory

voltage. In this case, IED considers impedance characteristics as well as
memory voltage determination.
If there is neither a current measured voltage nor a memorized voltage

available which is sufficient for measuring the direction, the IED selects
the forward direction. In practice this can only occur when the circuit
breaker closes onto a de-energized line, and there is a fault on this line
(e.g. closing onto an earthed line).
1.2.7 Power swing blocking
48
1.2.7.1 Introduction
Power swings are oscillations in power flow. The power grid is a very
dynamic network that connects generation to load via transmission lines.
A disturbance-such as a sudden change of load whereas the mechanical
power input to generators remains relatively constant, a power system
fault, or a trip of a large generation unit-may break the balance, cause the
oscillations among the generator rotor angles and force the generators to
adjust to a new operating condition. The adjustment will not happen
instantaneously due to the inertia of the generator prime movers.
Oscillation rate is determined by the inertia of the system and
impedances between different generators.
1.2.7.2 Principle of operation
Power swings are variations in power flow that occur when the internal
voltages of generators at different locations of the power system slip
relative to each other. In this way, voltage and current waveforms will
have a low frequency oscillation over the power system nominal
frequency. Therefore impedance trajectory seen by a distance IED may
enter the fault detection zones and cause unwanted IED operation. For
example consider a simple case with two machine system shown in
Figure 11 to show the system behavior in power swing condition.
Figure 11 Two machine system to simulate power swing behavior
1.2.7.3 Impedance trajectory
The current passing through the feeder (IL) will be calculated in any time by:
ES  ER
IL 
ZS  ZL  ZR
Equation 13
The direction of current flow will remain the same during the power swing
event. Only the voltage displacement will change.
The impedance measured at an IED at bus A would then be:
49
VA ES  IL.ZS ES ES .(ZS  ZL  ZR)

Z    ZS   ZS
IL IL IL ES  ER
Equation 14
It is assumed that that ES has a phase advance of δ over ER and that the
ratio of the two source voltage magnitudes, ES/ER, is k. Then:
ES k (cos   j sin  ) k (k  cos  )  j sin  

 
ES  ER k (cos   j sin  )  1 (k  cos  ) 2  sin 2
Equation 15
For the particular case where the two sources magnitudes are equal or k
is one, Equation 15 can be expressed as:
ES 1 
 (1  j cot )
ES  ER 2 2
Equation 16
And finally the impedance measured at the IED will be:
VA ( ZS  ZL  ZR) 
Z  (1  j cot )  ZS
IL 2 2
Equation 17
Therefore, the trajectory of the measured impedance at the IED during a

power swing varies when the angle between the two source voltages
changes. Figure 12 shows the impedance trajectories for different
voltage ratios between two machines.
50
Figure 12 Impedance trajectories for k values
Figure 13 shows the practical possible impedance trajectory which may

happen in the power system. Cases 1 and 2 indicate a stable power
swing which entered the distance protection tripping zone. Case 3 is
unstable power swing which enters and exits the trip zones. Case 4 also
shows the impedance trajectory in the case of short circuit occurrence in
the power system.
Figure 13 Impedance trajectories for different power swing conditions
1.2.7.4 Power swing blocking/unblocking
To ensure the correct operation of the protection logic and avoiding IED
mal-operation in power swings conditions, power swing blocking function
51
has been integrated in IED. The main purpose of the PSB function is to
differentiate between faults and power swings and block distance.
However, faults that occur during a power swing must be detected and
cleared with a high degree of selectivity and dependability. Power swing
blocking happens if one of the following conditions remains for 30ms.
 All phase currents are bigger than the current setting of ―I_PS‖, and
the sudden-change current elements have not operated.
 All phase-to-phase impedances loops enter into the largest zone of

distance relay, and the sudden-change current elements have not
operated.
As mentioned, if any of the above conditions has been valid for 30ms,
power swing startup will operate and protection program is switched to
power swing blocking routine. At the same time, ―I_PS STARTUP‖ (for
the first condtion) or ―Z STARTUP‖ (for the second condition) and
―RELAY STARTUP‖ signals are reported. It should be note that ―I_PSB‖
should be set larger than maximum load current in the protected feeder.
Operation of sudden-change current indicates a fault occured in the

power system network. In short circuit conditions, the measured
impedance jumps instantaneously from load impedance area to the fault
detection zones. On the other hand, power swings have a slow behavior.
So, lack of operation of current sudden-change element beside high
measured current and/or low calculated impedance indicates that power
swing happened in the system. Therefore above condition has been used
to initiate power swing startup element.
In addition, experimental results of power swing show that it is not

possible for impedance vector to come into the first distance zone in 150
msec after current sudden-change startup operation. Therefore, power
swing blocking logic has been designed such that in 150 msec after
current sudden-change startup, power swing blocking will not happen
and distance protection can trip in this duration if required conditions
fulfill.
System power swings are normally three-phase symmetrical processes.

Therefore, in general, a certain degree of measured value symmetry may
be assumed. Accordingly, beside current sudden-change startup, zero
sequence current startup will be used to remove or prevent power swing
blocking. In addition fault detection during a power swing removes power
swing blocking in the tripping logic.
This unblocking logic of the zones which have already blocked with
52
power swing blocing has been shown in Figure 14. In this logic,
―Z1(2,3,4,5)_PS blocking‖ indicates corresponding setting value for
blocking of the zones in power swing condition.
―I_PSB‖ startup
Zero- sequence
current startup O A
R N
D
|150 0|
Current change A O NO PS 1 (2,3,4,5)
startup N R
D
Fault detect swing A

unblocking N
D
Z1(2,3,4,5)_PS blocking
Figure 14 Power swing unblocking release logic
The amount of kinetic energy gained by the generators during a fault is

directly proportional to fault duration and the positive sequence voltage at
the point of fault. Therefore, application of highspeed relaying systems
and high-speed breakers is essential in locations where fast fault clearing
is important. So, the faults that occur during a power swing must be
detected and cleared with a high degree of selectivity and dependability.
For this purpose, IED considers different fault detector elements during
power swing occurrence for symmetric and asymmetric faults. It also
provides six binary settings which can be set to block individually each
protection zones (―Zx_PS blocking‖ where x, 1, 1Ext, 2, 3, 4,5, indicates
zone number).
In the duration of power swing, there is a special program module to

detect whether power swing has been finished or not. So, after removing
of all the conditions that indicate power swing occurrence, IED will be
reset and exited from power swing module by ―Relay reset‖ time.
1.2.9.4.1 Asymmetric faults detection element
Power swing is generally a three phase system and some degree of

symmetric behavior is considered in this condition. Therefore, zero and
negative sequence current can distinguish fault from power swing. The
criterion is described as following:
|I0|>m1|I1| or I 2>m2|I 1|
53
Equation 18
Factors m1 and m2 ensure that power swing can be reliability

differentiated from internal asymmetric faults. When only power swing
occurs in the network, zero and negative sequences will be close to zero
and it is not possible for the above equations to be fulfilled. When both
power swing and external asymmetric fault occur, the zero and negative
sequences, which will be seen by IED, are not so considerable to satisfy
above equations. But in the case of power swing and internal asymmetric
fault happening at the same time, zero and negative sequence of the
measured current will be large enough to detect the fault in the power
swing durations.
Therefore, mal-operation of the protection IED will be prevented by

checking above criteria.
1.2.9.4.2 Three phase fault detection element
As mentioned, the amount of kinetic energy in the generator rotors is

proportional to duration of faults which may be dangerous for system
stability, particularly in three phase faults. Therefore, a three phase fault
in power swing duration should be cleared as soon as possible. IED
guarantees fast tripping of the three phase faults in power swing duration
by considering following states.
Impedance and resistance trajectory in the power swing
During power swing, measuring resistance or impedance at the IED

location will change continuously with time. Changing rate will be affected
by the inertia of the system and impedances between different
generators. In addition, this rate is also characterized by swing period
and the machine angle, δ. Figure 15 shows a typical trajectory of
measuring resistance in the power swing duration. Rf indicates normal
load resistance component and Tz power swing period. During power
swing, whether the trajectory of measuring impedance is a line or a
circular arc on R-X plane depends on the voltage ratios between
machines in an equivalent two machine system.
54
(a) Resistance (Rm) trajectory in normal and power swing condition
(b) Impedance trajectory on R-X plane in power swing condition
Figure 15 Trajectory of the measuring impedance during power swing
Resistance trajectory in three phase faults
When a three phase fault occurs on the protected line, resistance

component of measuring impedance maybe changes due to short circuit
arc. Analysis shows that arc resistance rating in three phase fault is far
less than that of resistance changing corresponding to the possibly
largest swing period. Figure 16 illustrates measured resistance trajectory
in normal and three phase fault conditions. In this figure RK indicates
resistance in three phase short circuit. Unlike power swing conditions,
resistance variation after three phase fault is negligible.
Figure 16 Measuring resistance trajectory in normal and three phase faults
55
Therefore, power system is determined to be in power swing condition if

its measuring resistanceis continuously changing in a monotony manner.
Conversely, three phase short circuit will be determined if resistance
variations seem to be a small constant.
To determine the resistance variation threshold value, worst case

condition is considered. This will happen when the difference between
internal angles of generators is 180°(in an equivalent two machine
system) and power system has maximum power swing period TZMAX.
This condition has been shown in Figure 17.
o
Figure 17 Trajectory of the measuring resistance with δ=180 and TZMAX
Therefore, a minimum resistance variation ΔRmin(180°,TZMAX,τ) is

obtained by introducing a measuring window time equal to τ. In this way,
for any swing period, the following relation will be valid for measured
resistance variation:
ΔR ≥ ΔRmin(180°,TZMAX, τ)
Equation 19
Considering measuring error and margin coefficient, above criterion

should be changed to:
ΔR ≥ K×ΔRmin(180°,TZMAX, τ)
56
Equation 20
where K is a less than 1.
Considering above processes, fault detection criteria in power swing

condition will be as following:
 If resistance variation follows: ΔR < ΔRmin(180o,TZMAX, τ), it is
concluded that three phase short has occurred during the power
swing.
 If resistance variation follows: ΔR ≥ ΔRmin(180o,TZMAX, τ), it is
concluded power swing condition without three phase fault has

happened.
Fault detection using impedance jumping
In conditions when three phase fault suddenly occurs on the protected

line outside the power swing center point or the generator difference
angle (δ) is not approximately 180°, the magnitude and angle of
measured impedance will jump and exceed rated changes. Based on this
behavior, distance element can be unblocked quickly when three-phase
fault happen with above conditions.
1.2.8 Phase-to-earth fault determination
For phase-to-earth fault logic, zero-sequence current or zero-sequence

voltage should also be considered. For solid earthed system, only if the
measured trinal zero-sequence current is no less than the setting
―3I0_Dist_PE‖ could phase-to-earth fault be determined; For isolated
netral system, only if the measured trinal zero-sequence current is no
less than the setting ―3I0_Dist_PE‖, and the measured trinal
zero-sequence voltage is no less than the setting ―3U0_Dist_PE‖, could
phase-to-earth fault be determined.
1.2.9 Logic diagram
57
1.2.9.1 Distance protection tripping logic
As mentioned, when a fault occurres, one or more startup elements,

including current sudden-change startup, zero sequence current startup
and low-voltage startup, will detect the fault. Impedance calculation
computes all measuring loops (A, B, C, A-B, B-C, C-A) simultaneously
using 6 measuring systems. Additionally, phase selector sequence will
run and determines faulted loops accurately. Finarlly, selected fault
impedance and setting values will be compared to verify that fault is
within protection zones.
By checking and fulfilling the fault detection criteria, IED distance

protection will trip according to the following logics for different faults and
zones:
No Power swing
One of the main criteria in tripping logic of different zones is that IED
doesn’t detect power swing. Power swing blocking can be activated
individually by different binary settings (Zx_PS blocking, where x
indicates a zone number). In IED, power swing will be detected by power
swing startup elements (for detail information refers under heading
―Power swing blocking/unblocking‖).
Zone 1 faults
Zone 1 fault detection logic is shown as following figure:
Impedance
Within z1
A
Forward direction N Z1 detection
D
No PS 1
Figure 18 Zone 1 fault detection logic
A fault is considered in Zone 1 if the calculated impedance lies within Z1

characteristic zone and direction checking criteria confirms that the fault
is forward direction. In addition, power swing unblocking should be
released. As mentioned before, power swing blocking for zone 1 can be
selected individually by binary setting ―Z1_PS blocking‖. If the ―Z1_PS
blocking‖ is set to ―off‖, power swing blocking is disabled. If the setting
―Z1_PS blocking‖ is set to ―on‖, power swing blocking will be enabled.
58
Zone 2 faults
Zone 2 fault detection logic is shown in Figure 19.
Impedance
Within Z2
A
NOT reverse direction N Z2 detection
D
No Ps 2
Figure 19 Zone 2 fault detection logic
A fault is considered in Zone 2 if the calculated impedance lies within Z2

characteristic zone and direction checking criteria confirms that the fault
is not reverse. In addition, power swing unblocking should be released.
As mentioned above, power swing blocking for zone 1 can be selected
individually by binary setting ―Z2_PS blocking‖. If ―Z2_PS blocking‖ is set
to ―off‖, power swing blocking is disabled. If ―Z2_PS blocking‖ is set to
―on‖, power swing blocking will be enabled.
Zone 3 faults
Impedance
Within Z3
NOT reverse direction A

N
Asymmetric fault D
No PS 3
O Z3 detection
R
Impedance
Within Z3
A
Symmetric fault N
D
No Ps 3
Figure 20 Zone 3 fault detection tripping logic
Above figure shows the fault detection logic of zone 3. The main
condition of detection is that the calculated impedance lies within Z3
characteristic zone. In addition, detection logic is different for symmetric
and asymmetric faults. For asymmetric faults IED checks direction
59
criteria to be not reverse while in symmetric faults only the calculated

impedance will be considered. Same as previous ones, power swing
blocking for zone 3 can also be selected individually by binary setting
―Z3_PS blocking‖. If ―Z3_PS blocking‖ is set to ―off‖, power swing
blocking is disabled. If ―Z3_PS blocking‖ is set to ―on‖, power swing
blocking will be enabled.
Zone 4 & 5 faults
Figure 25 shows fault detection logic of zones 4 and 5. Same as zone3,

calculated impedance vector is the main criteria of the zones 4 and 5
detection logic. Since these zones can be selected as forward or reverse
direction, detection logic will be different in these two cases. Forward
direction will be selected if direction detection criteria conciders that the
fault is ―Not Reverse‖. Conversely, inverse direction will be selected if
direction detection checking determines fault as ―Not Forward‖. Here, it is
also possible to select zones 4 and 5 blocking in power swing condition by
binary settings ―Z4_PS blocking‖ and ―Z5_PS blocking‖.
Impedance
Within Z4

N
Reverse_Z4 Off D
No PS 4 O Z4 detection
R
Impedance
Within Z4
A
N
NOT forward direction
D
Reverse_Z4 On
60
Impedance
Within Z5

N
Reverse_Z5 Off D
No PS 5 O Z5 detection
R
Impedance
Within Z5
A
N
NOT forward direction
D
Reverse_Z5 On
Figure 21 Zones 4 and 5 fault detection in tripping logic
1.2.9.2 Tripping logic
Distance protection tripping will be blocked in the case of VT Fail

detection (for more detail, refer to under heading ―VT Fail detection‖). In
addition in the case of Switch-onto-Fault condition, the delay timers of
zone 1, 2 and 3 will be bypassed and short circuit will be immediately
removed.
IED provides two binary settings, ―AR Init by 3p‖ ―AR Init by 2p‖ to set
auto-reclosing operation for three phase faults, phase to phase fault, and
single phase faults.
If both binary settings ―AR Init by 3p‖ and ―AR Init by 2p‖ are disabled,
IED only initiates auto-reclosing for single phase faults.
If both ―AR Init by 3p‖ and ―AR Init by 2p‖ are enabled, IED can operate
both for three phase faults, phase to phase fault, and single phase faults.
If binary setting ―AR Init By 2p‖ is enabled, while ―AR Init By 3p‖ is
disabled, AR will only be initiated by phase to phase fault or single phase
faults.
Tripping of distance protection by Zone 2 to 5 is also considered to be

permanent without any auto-reclosing initiation.
61
VT fail
Func_SOTF On
A
SOTF N
D
O
R
A
Z1 detection |T1 0|
N Unpermenent trip
Ext Z1 detection |T1Ext 0|
A O
Z2 detection |T2 0| Permenent trip
N R
Z3 detection |T3 0|
O D
R
Z4 detection |T4 0|
Z5 detection |T5 0|
Figure 22 Distance protection tripping logic
AR not ready
A Trip single
phase
N
Single fault D
Relay Trip 3pole off
Relay Trip 3pole on

A
BI “1P Trip N O Trip Tree
Block” phase
D R
AR Init By 2p on
Two phase fault
AR Init By 2p off
AR Init By 3p on
Permenent
Three phase fault Trip
O
AR Init By 3p off
R
AR Init By 2p off O
R
Figure 23 Trip logic
Note:
62
The above trip logic applies to the first zone and the extended first zone
of distance protection as well as teleprotection
1.3 Input and output signals
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB
IP3 Trip PhC

IN Trip 3Ph
IN（M） Relay Block AR
UP1 Zone1 Trip
UP2 Zone2 Trip
UP3 Zone3 Trip

Zone4 Trip
Zone5 Trip
Zone1Ext Trip
PSB Dist OPTD
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Table 5 Analog input list
Signal Description
IP1 Signal for current input 1

IN External input of zero-sequence current
IN(M) External input of zero-sequence current of
adjacent line
UP1 Signal for voltage input 1
Table 6 Binary output list
Signal Description
Relay Startup Relay Startup

Relay Trip Relay Trip
63
Signal Description
Trip PhA Trip phase A

Trip PhB Trip phase B
Trip PhC Trip phase C
Trip 3Ph Trip three phases
Relay Block AR Permanent trip, or AR being blocked
Zone1 Trip Zone1 distance protection trip
Zone1Ext Trip Extended zone1 distance protection trip
PSB Dist OPTD Distance operated in power swing
1.4 Setting parameters
1.4.1 Setting list
Table 7 Distance protection function setting list
Max. Default
Min.
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/1 setting Description
(Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
compensation factor of zero
Kx -0.33 8 1
sequence reactance
Kr -0.33 8 1
sequence resistance
Km -0.33 8 0 sequence mutual
inductance of parallel line
positive reactance of the
X_Line Ohm 0.01 600 10
whole line
positive resistance of the
R_Line Ohm 0.01 600 2
whole line
Line length km 0.1 999 100 Length of line
current threshold of power
I_PSB A 0.5 20Ir 2Ir
system unstability detection
resistance reach of zone 1
R1_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1/5
of phase to earth distance
64
Max. Default
Min.
(Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
protection
reactance reach of zone 1 of
X1_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1/5 phase to earth distance
protection
R2_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 of phase to earth distance
protection
X2_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 phase to earth distance
protection
protection
protection
R4_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 3/15 of phase to earth distance
protection
X4_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 3/15 phase to earth distance
protection
protection
protection
resistance reach of
R1Ext_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 extended zone 1 of phase to
earth distance protection
reactance reach of
X1Ext_PE Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 extended zone 1 of phase to
earth distance protection
delay time of zone 1 of
T1_PE s 0 60 0 phase to earth distance
protection
T2_PE s 0 60 0.3 phase to earth distance
protection
T3_PE s 0 60 0.6 delay time of zone 3 of
65
Max. Default
Min.
(Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
phase to earth distance
protection
protection
protection
delay time of extended zone
T1_Ext_PE s 0 60 0.05 1 of phase to earth distance
protection
R1_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1/5 of phase to phase distance
protection
X1_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1/5 phase to phase distance
protection
R2_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 of phase to phase distance
protection
X2_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 phase to phase distance
protection
protection
protection
R4_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 3/15 of phase to phase distance
protection
X4_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 3/15 phase to phase distance
protection
protection
protection
66
Max. Default
Min.
(Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
resistance reach of
R1Ext_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 extended zone 1 of phase to
phase distance protection
reactance reach of
X1Ext_PP Ohm 0.01/0.05 120/600 1.6/8 extended zone 1 of phase to
phase distance protection
T1_PP s 0 60 0 phase to phase distance
protection
T2_PP s 0 60 0.3 phase to phase distance
protection
protection
protection
protection
delay time of extended zone
T1_Ext_PP s 0 60 0.05 1 of phase to phase
distance protection
zero sequence current
3I0_Dist_P
A 0.1Ir 2Ir 0.1Ir threshold of phase to earth
E
distance protection
zero sequence voltage
3U0_Dist_
V 0.5 60 1 threshold of phase to earth
PE
distance protection
Table 8 Distance protection binary setting list
First zone distance protection

Func_Z1 1 0 1
operating mode (On/Off)
Second zone distance
Func_Z2 protection operating mode 1 0 1
(On/Off)
67
Third zone distance protection

Func_Z3 1 0 1
operating mode (On/Off)
Fourth zone distance
Func_Z4 protection operating mode 1 0 1
(On/Off)
Setting for fourth zone
Reverse_Z4 distance protection operation 0 0 1
as reverse
Fifth zone distance protection
Func_Z5 1 0 1
operating mode
Setting for fifth zone distance
Reverse_Z5 protection operation as for 0 0 1
reverse
Extended zone 1 distance
Func_Z1Ext protection operating mode 1 0 1
(On/Off)
Blocking of the first zone
Z1_PS Blocking distance protection in power 1 0 1
swing
Blocking of the second zone
Z2_PS Blocking distance protection in power 1 0 1
swing
Blocking of the third zone
Z3_PS Blocking distance protection when 1 0 1
power swing
Blocking of the fourth zone
Z4_PS Blocking distance forward protection in 1 0 1
power swing
Blocking of the fifth zone
Z5_PS Blocking distance forward protection in 1 0 1
power swing
Blocking of the extended zone
Z1Ext_PS Blocking 1 distance forward protection 1 0 1
in power swing
Second zone distance
protection speedup operating
Z2 Speedup 0 0 1
mode by auto-reclosing on to
fault
Third zone distance protection
Z3 Speedup speedup operating mode by 0 0 1
auto-reclosing on to fault
68
Distance protection speedup

Z23 Speedup Inrush Block 0 0 1
operating blocked by inrush
1.4.2 Setting explanation
 Kx: Reactance compensation factor,It should be calculated based on

the actual line parameters. Finally, the setting value should be less
than or close to calculation value.
KX = (X0-X1) / 3X1
 Kr: Resistance compensation factor, It should be Calculated based on

the actual line parameters. Finally, the setting value should be less
than or close to calculation value.
KR = (R0-R1) / 3R1
 Km: Compensation factor for zero sequence mutual reactance of

parallel lines, It shoule be calculated based on the actual line
parameters.The setting value should be less than or close to
calculation value. X0m is the zero sequence mutual reactance in the
parrallel lines. X1 is the positive sequence reactance of the line where
IED is located.
Km= X0m/3X1
 X_Line and R_Line: Line positive reactance and resistance：It is set

according to secondary values of actual line parameters.
 Zone 1 FUNC, Zone Ext FUNC, Zone 2 FUNC, Zone 3 FUNC, Zone 4
FUNC and Zone 5 FUNC can be set by ―Func_Z1‖, ―Func_Z1Ext‖
―Func_Z2‖, ―Func_Z3‖, ―Func_Z4‖, ―Func_Z5‖individually.
 Reverse_Z4 and forward_Z4: zone 4 of the distance can be selected

to operate for reverse direction or forward direction. The mode of
operation can be set in these binary settings.
 Reverse_Z5 and forward_Z5: zone 5 of the distance can be selected

to operate for reverse direction or forward direction. The mode of
69
operation can be set in these binary settings.
 Power swing Blocking: the operation of zone 1, extension zone 1,

zone 2, zone 3, zone 4 and zone 5 can be separately selected to be
block or unblock during power swing. When the bit is set to ―1‖,
distance protection zones are disabled by power swing blocking
elements. If the bit is set to ―0‖, for any distance protection zone, the
relay can send trip command even in power swing condition.
 ―3I0_Dist_PE‖ and ―3U0_Dist_PE‖: minimum zero-sequence current

and minimum zero-sequence voltage for phase-to-earth protection
operation.
1.4.3 Calculation example for distance parameter settings
The solidy grounded 400kV overhead Line A-B has been shown in
A B
C
127km 139km
21/21N
21/21N
PTR:400/0.1kV
CTR:2000/5
Figure 24 and line parameters are as follows. It is assumed that the line
does not support teleprotection scheme beacuase lack of any
communication link.
A B
C
127km 139km
21/21N
21/21N
PTR:400/0.1kV
CTR:2000/5
Figure 24 400kV Overhead Line (A-B) protected by distance protection
For line 1 (line AB):
70
S1 (length): 127 km
Current Transformer: 2000 A/5 A
Voltage transformer: 400 kV/0.1 kV
Rated Frequency: 50 Hz
Rated power of the line: 300MVA
Full scale current of the line: 433A
R+Line1 =0.030 Ω/km
X+Line1 =0.353 Ω/km
R0line1 =0.302 Ω/km
X0Line1 =0.900 Ω/km
For line 2:
S2 (length) = 139 km
R+Line2 =0.030 Ω/km
X+Line2 =0.352 Ω/km
R0line2 =0.311 Ω/km
X0Line2 =0.898 Ω/km
So, The line angle can be derived from the line parameters:
Φ = arctan (X+ / R+)
So Line 1 Angle: 85.1°
The resistance ratio RE/RL and the reactance ratio XE/XL should be
applied for zero sequence compensation calculations. They are calculated
separately, and do not correspond to the real and imaginary components
of ZE/ZL.
71
R 0  R1
RE/RL = =3.00
3R1
X 0  X1
XE/XL = 0.52
3X 1
x' = 0.04 Ω/km in secondary side
Time Delays：
T1-p-e or p-p time delay 0.0 sec
T5 inactive
Zone Z1 impedance settings

The resistance settings of the individual zones have to cover the fault
resistance at the fault location. For the Zone 1 setting only arc faults will
be considered. The length of the arc is greater than the spacing between
the conductors (ph-ph), because the arc is blown into a curve due to
thermal and magnetic forces. For estimation purposes it is assumed that
arc lenght is twice the conductor spacing. To obtain the largest value of
Rarc, which is required for the setting, the smallest value of fault current
must be used. According to the conceptthat arc approximately has the
characteristic with 2500V/m, the arc resistance will be calculated with the
following equation:
2500 / m  2   ph  ph spacing 
Rarc 
I 3 PH  MIN
To calculate the minimum three phase short circuit current, it is required
to calculate the short circuit current in the end of line:
Min 3ph short circuit current in the local end, Isc: 10 kA
Short circuit capacity=SCC=√3×VL×Isc: 6920 MVA
72
S_base: 1000 MVA
SCC_pu: 6.92 pu
Z_source_pu≈ 1/Scc_pu: 0.14 pu
Z_source_ohm: 23.12 Ω
L_source= 0.073598 H
Positive sequence impedance: 0.03024+ j0.35276

Ω/km
Connected Line length: 127.0 km
Positive sequence impedance, Z_Line: 3.840+ j44.8 Ω=0.024+

j0.280 pu
I3ph- min=1pu/[Z_source+Z_Line] : 2.350 pu =3.396 kA
On secondary I3ph- min: 8.489 A
So, by considering the 3 m Ph-Ph spacing:
Rarc =4.417Ω
By addition of a 20 % safety margin and conversion to secondary

impedance the following minimum setting is calculated (division by 2 is
because of this fact that Rarc appears in ph-ph loop measurement while
the setting is done as phase impedance or positive sequence
impedance):
1.2  Rarc  CTR / PTR

R( Z1) 
2
So, R (Z1)min=0.265 Ω in Secondary Side
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to

obtain the desired arc resistance coverage. Depending on the X(Z1)
reach calculated, this setting may be increased to obtain the desired
Zone 1 polygon symmetry.
For phase to phase fault
73
X1+ =0.353 Ω/km
CTR=2000/5A
CTR/PTR=0.100
PTR=400/0.1kV
L1=127km
Xline1+ =4.48 Ω Secondary
Rline+ =0.384 Ω Secondary
Since, there is not any tele-protection scheme, to get fast tripping on the
longer length, Z1 setting for phase to phase fault is set to %85 of the line
instead %80.
X (Z1) =0.85 ×X+Line1 -Secondary
So, X (Z1) = 3.81Ω in Secondary Side
X (Ω)
XDZ
7°
14°
63.4°
14° RDZ R (Ω)
74
Figure 25
Line
X (ohm) angle
0.04
3.81 7°
85.1°
63.4°
R (ohm)
0.33
Figure 26
According to the above figure, reactance setting of the zone 1 is

considered as:
X (Z1)SET = 3.81 + 0.04 =3.85 Ω in Secondary Side
For phase to ground fault
Considering some error in the parameter calculation of RE/RL and XE/XL,

the reactance reach is considered as %80 of line A-B.
XE (Z1) = 0.8 ×X+Line1-Secondary
So,
XE (Z1) =3.58 Ω in Secondary Side
Line
X (ohm) angle
0.04
3.58 7°
85.1°
63.4°
R (ohm)
0.33
75
Figure 27 Characteristic zone example

considered as:
XE (Z1)SET =3.58 + 0.04=3.62 Ω in Secondary Side
For phase to phase fault
Considering minimum setting vaule of R(Z1) calculated before, for

overhead line protection applications, the following rule of thumb may be
used for the R(Z1) setting to get the best symmetry on polygon
characteristic:
0.8  X (Z1)  R(Z1)  2.5  X (Z1)
So,
3.05≤ R (Z1) ≤9.53
Therefore, in this case, setting value for R(Z1) is considered as:
R (Z1) = 3.10Ω in Secondary Side
For phase to earth fault
The phase to earth fault resistance reach is calculated along the same
way as ph-ph faults. For the earth fault however, not only the arc voltage
but also the tower footing resistance must be considered.
I2
RTF  (1  )  Effective Tower Resistance
I1
It is assumed that each tower resistance equals to: 15Ω
Effective tower resistance considering the parallel connection of multiple

tower footing resistance ≈2Ω
In the above equation, I2/I1 is the ratio between earth fault currents at the
opposite end to the local one. Where no information is available on the
current ratio, a value of approx. 3 is assumed for a conservative
approach.
76
Assumed I2/I1=3
So,
RTF=8Ω
For the calculation of Rarc using the formula introduced above, without
detail information about the tower configuration, ph totower spacing is
assumed to be 3m in the worst case (conservative solution).
Assumed ph-tower spacing: 3m
2500V  2   Ph  Tower Spacing 

Rarc 
I 1 ph  min
Min 1ph short circuit current in the local end, Isc: 5kA
S_base: 1000 MVA
I_base: 1.445 kA
Isc pu: 3.46 pu
Zs=2Z+source+Z0source_pu≈ 1/(Isc pu/3): 0.87pu
Positive sequence impedance: 0.0302+ j0.353

Ω/km
Zero sequence impedance 0.302+ j0.900

Ω/km
Connected Line lengh: 127.0 km
Positive sequence impedance, Z1_Line: 3.840+ j44.8 Ω

=0.024+ j0.28
pu
Zero sequence impedance, Z0_Line: 38.354+ 114.3

Ω =0.240+
j0.714 pu
I1ph- min=3×1pu/[Zs+2Z1_Line+Z0_Line] : 1.374490915

pu = 1.986
77
kA
And on secondary side,
I3ph- min=4.965 A
So, arc resistance will be:
Rarc=7.55 Ω
1.2  ( Rarc  RTF )  CTR / PTR

RE ( Z1) 
 RE 
1  
 RL 
So, RE (Z1) =0.5 Ω in Secondary Side
This calculated value corresponds to the smallest setting required to

obtain the desired resistance coverage. Depending on the X(Z1) reach
calculated above, this setting may be increased to obtain desired Zone 1
polygon symmetry.
XE
1
0.8  X ( Z1)  RE ( Z1)  XL  2.5  X ( Z1)
RE
1
RL
So, 3.05≤RE (Z1)≤3.62
Therefore, in this case, setting value for RE(Z1) is considered as:
RE (Z1) =3.10Ω in Secondary Side
Operating mode Z1 Forward
R(Z1), Resistance for ph-ph-faults 3.10 Ω
X(Z1), Reactance 3.81 Ω
RE(Z1), Resistance for ph-e faults 3.10 Ω
XE(Z1), Reactance 3.58 Ω
Tele protection scheme inactive
78
Power swing blocking zones All zones
Zone Z2 & Z3 impedance setting
According to the grading requirement:
X ( Z 2)  0.8   X  Line1  0.8  X  Line2shortest   

CTR
PTR
X+Line1 =44.8 Ω in primary
X+Line2 =48.928 Ω
CTR=2000/5 A
CTR/PTR=0.100
PTR=400/0.1kV
So,
X (Z2) =6.72 Ω in secondary side
Line
X (ohm) angle
0.07
6.72 7°
85.1°
63.4°
R (ohm)
0.58
Figure 28 Zone 2 protection characteristic setting

considered as:
X（Z2)SET =XE (Z2)SET =6.72 + 0.07= 6.79 Ω in secondary side
Resistance coverage for all arc faults up to the set reach must be applied.
79
As this zone is applied with overreach, an additional safety margin is

included, based on a minimum setting equivalent to the X(Z2) setting and
arc resistance setting for internal faults, R(Z1) setting. Therefore:
X ( Z 2)
R( Z 2) Min   R( Z1)
X ( Line1sec ondary )
So，R (Z2) Min =4.65 Ω in secondary side
According to the above minimum value, the setting is considered as:
R (Z2) =4.70Ω in secondary side
Similar to the R(Z2) setting, the minimum required reach for RE(Z2)
setting is based on the RE(Z1) setting which covers all internal fault
resistance and the X(Z2) setting which determines the amount of
overreach. Alternatively, the RE(Z2) reach can be calculated from the
R(Z2) reach with the following equation:
X ( Z 2)
RE ( Z 2)  1.2  RE ( Z1)
X ( Line1secondary )
So,
RE (Z2)Min=5.58 Ω in secondary side
Here the maximum value between R(Z2) and RE(Z2)min is selected:
So, RE (Z2) =5.58 Ω in Secondary Side
On the other hand, the resistance reach setting for Z2 and Z3 are set
according to the maximum load current and minimum load voltage. The
values are set somewhat (approx. 10 %) below the minimum expected
load impedance.
Maximum transmission power =250MVA
Imax =401 A at Vmin=0.9*Vn
Zload_Prim. = (0.9 × 400kV) / (401 ×√3) =518.334 Ω
Zload_Sec=52 Ω
80
When applying a security margin of 10 % the following is set:
Zload_Sec. =47 Ω
Assuming a minimum power factor of CosΦmin at full load condition = 0.85
So, Rload_Sec. =40 Ω
The spread angle of the load trapezoid Φ load (Ø-E) and Φload (Ø-Ø)
must be greater (approx. 5°) than the maximum arising load angle
(corresponding to the minimum power factor cosΦ).
Φ load = ArcCos (0.85) + 5 ≈37°
Therefore, according to the protection zones characteristic and maximum

calculated load impedance and angle, we will have:
X (Ω)
XDZ
7°
14°
63.4°
14° RDZ R (Ω)
X (ohm)
30.1
26.6°
37° 63.4°
R (ohm)
Rload=40
15.1
81
Therefore the maximum setting of R-Z3 should be as: 40-15.1=24.91 Ω
The calculated resistance for Z2 is far from the above maximum value
and so is acceptable. Finally, the zone 2 and 3 setting should as follows:
Operating mode Z2
Forward
R(Z2), Resistance for ph-ph-faults 4.70

Ω
X(Z2), Reactance 6.79

Ω
RE(Z2), Resistance for ph-e faults 5.58

Ω
XE(Z2), Reactance 6.79

Ω
Without any information about line3, Z3 is set %50 larger than Zone2, as
follows:
Operating mode Z3
Forward
R(Z3), Resistance for ph-ph-faults 7.05

Ω
X(Z3), Reactance 10.19

Ω
RE(Z3), Resistance for ph-e faults 8.37

Ω
XE(Z3), Reactance 10.19

Ω
Zone Z4
Zone 4 is considered to protect %30 of the zone 1 in reverse direction.
82
So, X (Z4) =0.3X(Z1)=1.16 Ω in secondary side
So, XE(Z4) =0.3XE(Z1)=1.07 Ω in secondary side
So, R (Z4) = 0.3R(Z1)= 0.93 Ω in secondary side
Similar to the R(Z4) setting, the upper and lower limits are defined by
minimum required reach and symmetry. In this application RE(Z4) reach
is set same as R(Z4). And finally:
RE(Z4) = 0.3RE(Z1)= 0.93 Ω in secondary side
Operating mode Z4 Reverse
R(Z4), Resistance for ph-ph-faults 0.93Ohm
X(Z4), Reactance 1.16Ohm
RE(Z4), Resistance for ph-e faults 0.93Ohm
XE(Z4), Reactance 1.07Ohm
Zone Z5
Zone 5 is set to be inactive.
1.5 Reports
Table 9 Event report list
Abbr. Meaning
Relay Startup Protection startup
Dist Startup Impedance element startup
3I0 Startup Zero-current startup
I_PS Startup Current startup for Power swing
Zone1 Trip Zone 1 distance trip
Zone1Ext Trip Zone 1 Extended distance trip
Dist SOTF Ttrip Distance element instantaneous trip after switching on to fault
83
(SOTF)
PSB Dist OPTD Distance operated in power swing
Z2 Speedup Trip Z2 instantaneous trip in SOTF or auto-reclosing on fault
Z3 Speedup Trip Z3 instantaneous trip in SOTF or auto-reclosing on fault
Trip Blk AR(3T) Permanent trip for 3-ph tripping failure
Relay Trip 3P Trip 3 poles
3P Trip (1T_Fail) three phase trip for 1-ph tripping failure
Distance zone 1 evolvement trip, for example, A phase to earth fault
Dist Evol Trip happened, and then B phase to earth fault followed, the latter is
considered as an evolvement trip
Fault Location Fault location
Impedance_FL Impedance of fault location
Table 10 Alarm report list
Abbr. Meaning
Func_Dist Blk Distance function blocked by VT fail
Table 11 Operation report list
Abbr. Meaning
Test mode On Test mode On
Test mode Off Test mode Off
Func_Dist On Distance function on
Func_Dist Off Distance function off
Func_PSB On PSB function on
Func_PSB Off PSB function off
1.6 Technical data

Table 12 Distance protection technical data
NOTE:
Ir: CT rated secondary current, 1A or 5A;
Item Rang or Value Tolerance

Number of settable zone 5 zones, with additional
extended zone
Distance characteristic Polygonal
Resistance setting range 0.01Ω～120Ω, step 0.01Ω, ≤± 5.0% static accuracy
when Ir=5A; Conditions:
84
0.05Ω～600Ω, step 0.01Ω, Voltage range: 0.01 Ur to 1.2

when Ir=1A; Ur
Reactance setting range 0.01Ω～120Ω, step 0.01Ω, Current range: 0.12 Ir to 20 Ir
when Ir=5A;
0.05Ω～600Ω, step 0.01Ω,
when Ir=1A;
Time delay of distance zones 0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s ≤±1% or +20 ms, at 70%
operating setting and setting
time > 60ms
Operation time 22ms typically at 70% setting
of zone 1
Dynamic overreaching for ≤±5%, at 0.5<SIR<30
zone 1
85
86
Chapter 5 Teleprotection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the protection principle, input and

output signals, parameters, IED report and technical data
used for teleprotection function.
87
1 Teleprotection schemes for distance
1.1 Introduction
Distance teleprotection is an important function in the IED to get fast

tripping of the short circuit in the area near to remote end. The function
employs carrier sending and receiving feature, power line carrier (PLC)
or dedicated fiber optic communication channels, to implement different
tele-protection scheme configuration.
1.2 Teleprotection principle
1.2.1 Permissive underreach transfer trip (PUTT) scheme
By setting the binary ―PUR mode‖ to ―1/on‖, teleprotection logic works in

permissive under reach mode. The permissive under reach transfer trip is
shown in Figure 31. The scheme is based on receiving and sending
signals. IED sends distance carrier signal if its startup elements operate
and a fault occurs in the first protection zone (Z1). To get reliable
operation in remote line end, the carrier send signal is prolong for 200
msec after resetting of the trip signal.
According to this scheme, IED will generate a trip command if a fault has
been detected in second protection zone (Z2) and a carrier signal has
been received for at least 5 msec. According to the mode selected (single
phase operation, three phase protection and also auto-reclosing mode),
teleprotection scheme can generate single or three phase tripping.For
more detail about tripping mode refer under heading ―Automatic reclosing
function‖.
In the following, different conditions are considered to show the operation

of the IED in the permissive under reach transfer trip mode.
88
Relay startup A
N
Relay reset D
A
O |200 0| CARR Send
N signal
Zone 1 operation R Trip
D
A
Zone 2 operation A
N Relay trip
N
D
D
Delay time 5ms A
N
D
CARR Received
Figure 31 Teleprotection logic for permissive under reach transfer trip
Internal fault-faults within protected line
Startup element operates when an internal fault occurs. If the fault has
been detected in Z1, IED trips local CB and sends signal to the remote
end. If fault occurs in the protected line outside Z1 setting, local CB will
be tripped instantaneously by detection of fault in Z2 and receiving of the
carrier signal from remote end for at least 5 msec.
External fault-faults outside of the protected line
For external faults in reverse direction, protection IED doesn’t send a

distance carrier signal. Therefore, remote end distance relay doesn’t
generate an instantaneous trip command by only detection of a fault in its
Z2 characteristic. Conversely, for external faults in forward direction, local
IED may detect the fault in Z2 but it doesn’t generate trip command
because lack of any receiving carrier signal from remote end. Therefore
both local and remote end distance protection will be stable for the
external faults without any tripping.
1.2.2 Permissive overreach transfer trip (POTT) scheme
This mode of operation can also be useful for extremely short lines where
a typical setting of 85% of line length for Z1 is not possible and selective
non-delayed tripping could not be achieved. In this case zone Z1 must be
delayed by a time, to avoid non- selective tripping of distance protection
by Z1.
Teleprotection logic works in permissive overreach mode if binary setting
89
―POR mode‖ is set to ―1-on‖. The permissive overreach transfer trip logic
has been shown in the below figure.
Relay startup A
N
Relay reset D
A
O |200 0| CARR Send
N signal
R Trip
D
A
Zone 2 operation A
N Relay trip
N
D
D
Delay time 5ms A
N
D
CARR Received
Figure 32 Teleprotection logic for permissive over reach transfer trip
This scheme is based on receiving and sending signals. IED sends

distance carrier signal if startup elements operate and a fault occurs in
the Z2 protection zone. To get reliable operation of the remote end, any
carrier sent signal is prolonged for 200ms after resetting of trip signal.
Additionally, to support permissive overreach scheme in the case of weak
infeed sources, special echo logic is considered in IED.
In this scheme, IED generates a trip command if a fault has been

detected in Z2 zone and a carrier signal received for at least 5 msec.
According to mode selected (single phase operation, three phase
protection and also auto-reclosing mode), teleprotection scheme can
generate single or three phase tripping. For more detail about tripping
mode refer under heading ―Automatic reclosing function‖.
1.2.3 Blocking scheme
In this scheme of operation, the transferring signal is utilized to block the

IED during external faults. The blocking signal should only be transmitted
when the fault is outside the protected zone in reverse direction.
The significant advantage of the blocking procedure is that no signal

needs to be transferred during faults on the protected feeder.
Teleprotection blocking will be applied in if the binary setting ―Blocking
mode‖ is set to ―1-on‖. Related logic is shown in Figure 33
90
Relay startup A
N
Relay reset D
A
CARR Send
Zone 4 （reverse） N signal
operation D
Zone 2 operation A A
N N Relay trip
D D
Delay time 25ms A
N
CARR Received D
Figure 33 Blocking scheme
IED sends blocking signal if startup elements operate and a fault has
been detected in reverse direction, e.g. Z4 considered as reverse. In this
scheme, IED generates a trip command if a fault has been detected in Z2
of the protection zones and no blocking signal received for at least 25
msec. According to the selected mode (single phase operation, three
phase protection and also auto-reclosing mode), teleprotection scheme
can generate single or three phase tripping. For more detail about
tripping mode refer under heading ―Auto-reclosing function‖.
In the following, different conditions will be considered to show operation

of the protected IED in the blocking mode.
Internal faults - faults within protected line
If an internal fault occurs, startup element operates and IED trips local
CB instantaneously if it is within Z1 zone. Since the fault is not reverse,
no blocking signal will be sent and remote end will generate trip
command by detection the fault in its Z2 zone. If fault occurs in the
protected line but outside of the Z1 setting, local CB tripping happen
instantaneously by detection of fault in Z2 and no receiving blocking
signal from remote end for at least 25 msec.
External faults - faults outside of protected line
For external faults in the reverse direction, IED sends a distance carrier
blocking signal. Therefore, remote end distance relay doesn’t generate
an instantaneous trip command by only detection of a fault in its Z2
characteristic zone. Conversely, in the case of external fault in forward
direction, local IED may detect the fault in Z2 but it doesn’t generate trip
command because of the receiving blocking signal from remote end.
91
Therefore both local and remote end distance IED will not trip for this
external fault.
1.2.4 Additional teleprotection logics
1.2.4.1 Direction reversing for external fault
For parallel lines, an external fault can cause direction reversal that may
generate unwanted tripping, if no suitable solution is considered. For
example, in Figure 34, there are parallel lines protected by distance
protection on each side. Additionally, the lines are protected using POTT
scheme. In this figure, a fault is occurred on line C-D and next to breaker
D. IED A can see the fault in its Z2 but its tripping will be prevented
because no carrier signal is received from side B. Now, if breaker in D is
tripped by its local IED before circuit breaker C, the fault current direction
in line A-B will suddenly reverse. This may cause distance teleprotection
in B to send carrier signal and therefore generate unwanted tripping of
breaker A. To have a reliable and selective trip command in each side
and solve the problem in these transition situations, some coordination
time should be considered. For this purpose, IED sends signal with a
setting delay time, ―T_Tele Reversal‖, if direction changes from reverse to
forward. This setting delay time exceeds the period when both sides
detect forward direction. Additionally, to have a reliable and selective trip
command for another internal fault, both sides will trip only after receiving
signal for at least 15msec.
Figure 34 Direction reversing for external fault in parallel lines
1.2.4.2 Weak infeed feeders
A special case for the application of permissive over reach transfer trip is
that fast tripping must be achieved for a feeder that has a weak infeed at
one end. In this case an additional echo-circuit with tripping supplement
must be provided at this end.
92
During a fault behind the weak infeed end, short circuit current flows
through the protected feeder to the fault location. The IED at the weak
infeed end will start with this current and recognize the fault in the reverse
direction. It will therefore not send a release signal to the strong infeed
end. The permissive over reach transfer trip protection is stable.
During an internal fault near the strong source side the IED at the weak
infeed end will not pickup, as insufficient current flows from this side into
the feeder. The signal received by the weak infeed end is returned as an
echo and allows the tripping at the strong infeed.
Simultaneously with the echo, the circuit breaker at the weak infeed end
may be tripped by the IED.
Therefore by operating low voltage startup element and receiving carrier

signal for at least 5 msec, distance carrier signal will be sent and
prolonged for 200 msec to ensure the IED at the remote end (strong
source) trips quickly and reliably. In this case local weak feeder
generates trip command, too. In addition, in the case of carrier receiving
and then CB opening, signal sending will be prolonged for 200 msec to
correct and reliable operation of remote end.
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
IN Trip 3Ph
UP1 Relay Block AR
UP2
Carr Send(Dist)
UP3 Carr Fail(Dist)
Carr Recv(Dist)
Tele_Dist_Trip
Carr Fail(Dist) Weak End Infeed
BI_DTT Send BO_DTT Send
BI_DTT Recv BO_DTT Recv
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
93
Signal Description

Table 14 Binary input list
Signal Description
Carr Recv (Dist) Carrier signal received for Dist protection

Carr Fail (Dist) Carrier signal failed for Dist protection
BI_DTT Send Direct Tele trip send
BI_DTT Recv Direct Tele trip receive
Signal Description

Relay Block AR Permanent trip
Carr Send(Dist) Carrier signal sent for Dist protection
Carr Fail(Dist) Carrier signal failed for Dist protection
Tele_Dist_Trip Tele_Dist trip
Weak End Infeed Weak End Infeed
BO_DTT Send Direct tele trip send
BO_DTT Recv Direct tele trip receive

94
1.4.1 Setting list
Table 16 Tele-Dist protection function setting list
Time delay for

T_Tele Reversal 40 ms 0 100
direction reversing
Table 17 Tele-Dist protection binary setting list
Weak InFeed Weak InFeed Mode 0 0 1

Blocking Mode Blocking Mode 0 0 1
PUR Mode PUR Mode 0 0 1
POR Mode POR Mode 1 0 1
first zone distance
Func_Z1 protection Operating 1 0 1
mode
second zone distance
Func_Z2 protection Operating 1 0 1
mode
1) Conditions for enabling weak-source function: If only one side of the

protected line is weak-source, the protection can be done selectively
when the IED in weak side operates in Week InFeed mode.
2) POR mode: If this bit is set to ―1/on‖ then the bits ―Blocking mode‖
and ―PUR mode‖ must be set to ―0/off‖. Under this mode, if zone2 module
needs to send permissive signal, close the contacts of sending signal,
―Carr Send (Dist)‖, to send permissive signal. If zone2 module needs to
stop sending permissive signal, open this contact to stop sending
permissive signal. At the same time, the binary setting ―Func_Z2‖ should
be enabled.
3) PUR mode: If this bit is set to ―1/on‖, bits ―Blocking mode‖ and ―POR
mode‖ must be set to ―off‖. Under this mode, if zone2 module needs to
95
send permissive signal, close the contacts of sending signal, ―Carr

Send(Dist)‖, to send permissive signal. If zone2 module needs to stop
sending permissive signal, open the contacts of sending signal to stop
sending permissive signal. At the same time, both binary settings of
―Func_Z1‖ and ―Func_Z2‖ should be enabled.
1.5 Reports
Abbr. Meaning
Tele_DIST_Trip Distance protection tripping using tele-protection signal
Tele Evol Trip Tele evolvement trip
Carr Stop(Dist) Carrier signal stopped for Dist protection, only in blocking mode
Carr Stop(CBO) Carrier signal stopped for CB open, only in blocking mode
Carr Stop(Weak) Carrier signal stopped for weak-infeed end , only in blocking mode
Carr Send(Dist) Carrier signal sent for Dist protection
Carr Send(CBO) Carrier signal sent for Dist protection
Carr Send(Weak) Carrier signal sent for weak-infeed end
Abbr. Meaning
Carr Fail (Dist) Carrier fail in distance tele-protection
Tele Mode Alarm Tele Mode Alarm
Abbr. Meaning
Func_TeleDist On Distance tele-protection function on
FuncTeleDist Off Distance tele-protection function off
1.6 Technical data
Table 21 Tele-protection technical data

Operating time 25ms typically in permission
mode for 21/21N, at 70%
setting
96
2 Teleprotection for directional earth

fault protection
2.1 Introduction
Teleprotection for directional earth fault is an important feature in the

transmission line protection. Similar to distance tele-protection, the
function employs carrier sending and receiving feature, power line carrier
(PLC) or dedicated fiber optic communication channels, to implement
different tele-protection scheme configuration.
To detect earth fault reliably and selectively, IED considers teleprotection

scheme as following:
Relay startup A
N
Relay reset D
A O |200 0| CARR (DEF)
Zero-Forward N Trip Send
direction
R
D
3I0>3I0_Tele EF A
POR Mode on
N
A |T_tele EF|
D Relay trip
N
D
A
CARR (DEF) N
Received D
Tele_EF Inrush unblock
Figure 35 Teleprotection for directional earth fault logic
It will come into operation if binary setting ―3I0_Tele_FUNC‖ is set to

―1/on‖ and ―POR‖ mode has been selected.In the case of an internal fault,
the startup elements operate and DEF carrier signal will be sent if
measured earth fault current exceed setting ―3I0_Tele EF‖, its direction
indicates forward fault and its delay time setting ―T0_tele EF‖ expired. In
addition, if binary setting ―Tele_EF Inrush Block‖ has been set to ―1/on‖,
directional earth fault carrier sending can be blocked by inrush current
detection.
When an external fault occurs, fault direction in one end will be reverse.
97
Therefore, in this end, no tripping command will be generated by

directional earth fault carrier receiving.
In addition, carrier sending will prolong for 200 msec for reliable
operation of remote end. The prolongation of the send signal only comes
into effect when the protection has already issued a trip command. This
ensures that the permissive signal releases the opposite line end even if
the earth fault is very rapidly cleared by a different independent
protection.
2.2.1.1 Direction reversing for external fault
For detail please refer ―1.2.4.1Direction reversing for external fault‖.
2.2.1.2 Weak infeed feeders
For detail please refer ―1.2.5.2Weak infeed feeders‖
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
UP1 Trip 3Ph
UP2 Relay Block AR
UP3 Carr Send(DEF)

Carr Recv(DEF) Carr Fail(DEF)
BI_DTT Send Tele_DEF_Trip
BI_DTT Recv Weak End Infeed
Weak InFeed BO_DTT Send
Carr Fail(DEF) BO_DTT Recv
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description
98
Signal Description

Signal Description
Carr Recv(DEF) Carrier signal received for DEF protection

Carr Fail(DEF) Carrier signal failed for DEF protection
BI_DTT Send Direct tele trip send
BI_DTT Recv Direct Tele trip receive
POR Mode POR Mode
Weak InFeed Weak InFeed Mode
Signal Description

Carr Send(DEF) Carrier signal sent for DEF protection
Carr Fail(DEF) Carrier signal failed for DEF protection
Tele_DEF_Trip Tele_DEF trip
Weak End Infeed Weak End Infeed
BO_DTT Send Direct Tele trip send
BO_DTT Recv Direct Tele trip receive
99
2.4.1 Setting lists
Table 25 Tele-EF protection function setting list
Min. Max. Default

Setting Unit (Ir:5A/ (Ir:5A/ setting Description
1A) 1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
T_Tele
ms 0 100 40 Time delay of power reserve
Reversal
zero sequence current threshold of
3I0_Tele
A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir tele-protection based on earth fault
EF
protection
T0_Tele time delay of tele-protection based on
s 0.01 10 0.15
EF earth fault protection
Table 26Tele-EF protection binary setting list
POR Mode POR Mode 1 0 1

Tele earth fault
Func_Tele EF 0 0 1
protection function
Tele earth fault
Tele_EF Inrush Block protection blocked by 0 0 1
inrush
Auto reclosure
Tele_EF Init AR initiated by tele earth 0 0 1
fault protection
Note: For tele-EF protection, the setting binary ―POR Mode‖ must be
enabled, while the setting binary ―PUR Mode‖ must be disabled.
2.5 Reports
Abbr. Meaning
Tele evolvement trip, for example, A phase to earth fault happened,
Tele Evol Trip and then B phase to earth fault followed, the latter is considered as
an evolvement trip
100
Abbr. Meaning
Carr Send(DEF) Send carrier signal in DEF
Tele_DEF_Trip Tele_DEF trip
Abbr. Meaning
Carr Fail(DEF) Carrier fail in TeleDEF
Tele Mode Alarm Tele Mode Alarm
Abbr. Meaning
Func_Tele_DEF On TeleDEF function on
Func_TeleDEF Off TeleDEF function off
101
102
Chapter 6 Overcurrent protection
About this chapter
This chapter describes the protection principle, input and output

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used for
overcurrent protection.
103
1 Overcurrent protection
1.1 Introduction
The directional/non-directional overcurrent protection function can be applied

as backup protection functions in various applications for transmission lines.
The directional overcurrent protection can be used based on both the
magnitude of the fault current and the direction of power flow to the fault
location. Main features of the overcurrent protection are as follows:
 2 definite time stages and 1 inverse time stage
 Supporting of all IEC and ANSI predefined time-inverse characteristic

curves (4 IEC and 7 ANSI) as well as an optional user defined characteristic
 Settable directional element characteristic angle, to satisfy different

network conditions and applications
 Each stage can be set individually as directional/non-directional
 Each stage can be set individually for inrush restraint
 Cross blocking function for inrush restraint
 Settable maximum inrush current
 VT secondary circuit supervision for directional protection. Once VT

failure happens, the directional stage can be set to be blocked automatically
1.2.1 Measured quantities
The phase currents are fed to the IED via the input current transformers. The
earth current 3I0 could also be connected to the starpoint of the current
transformer set directly as measured quantity.
1.2.2 Time characteristic
104
There are 2 definite time stages and 1 inverse time stage. All 12 kinds of the
time-inverse characteristics are available. It is also possible to create a user
defined characteristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the
integrated inrush restraint, directional determination feature. Furthermore,
each stage is independent from each other and can be combined as desired.
Each phase current is compared with the corresponding setting value with
delay time. If currents exceed the associated pickup setting value, after the
time delay elapse, the trip command is issued.
The pickup value for time-inverse stage can be set in setting value. The
measured phase currents compare with corresponding setting value. The
protection will issue a trip command with corresponding time delay if any
phase exceeds the setting value.
The time delay of time-inverse characteristic is calculated based on the type

of the characteristic, the magnitude of the current and a time multiplier. For
the time-inverse characteristic, both ANSI and IEC based standard curves are
available and any user-defined characteristic can be defined using the
following equation:
 
 
 A _ OC Inv 
T  P _ OC Inv
 B _ OC Inv   K _ OC INV
 i  
  I _ OC Inv  
  
Equation 21
where:
A_OC Inv: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_OC Inv: Time delay for inverse time stage
P_OC Inv: index for inverse time stage
K_OC Inv: Time multiplier Inrush restraint feature
The IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during transformer
energizing. Inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which
does not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, inrush current may affect
the protection functions which will operate based on the fundamental
component of the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is
provided to prevent overcurrent protection from maloperation.
105
The inrush restraint feature operates based on evaluation of the 2nd harmonic
content which is present in measured current. The inrush condition is
recognized when the ratio of second harmonic current to fundamental
component exceeds the corresponding setting value for each phase. The
setting value is applicable for both definite time stage and inverse time stage.
The inrush restraint feature will be performed as soon as the ratio exceeds
the set threshold.
Furthermore, by recognition of the inrush current in one phase, it is possible

to set the protection in a way that not only the phase with the considerable
inrush current, but also the other phases are blocked for a certain time. This is
achieved by cross-blocking feature integrated in the IED.
Additionally, the inrush restraint feature has a maximum inrush current setting.
Once the measuring current exceeds the setting, the overcurrent protection
will not be blocked any longer.
1.2.3 Direciton determination feature
The direction detection is performed by determining the position of current

vector in directional characteristic. In other words, it is done by comparing
phase angle between the fault current and the reference voltage. Figure 36
illustrates the direction detection characteristic for phase A element.
Forward 90° IA
Bisector
Angle_Range
OC
Angle_OC
0°
U BC_Ref
-IA
Figure 36 Overcurrent protection directional characteristic
where:
Angle_OC: The settable characteristic angle
Angle_Range OC: 85º
106
Table 30 presents the assignment of the applied measuring quantities used in

direction determination for different fault types. In this way, healthy line to line
voltages are used as reference voltage for determination of fault current
direction in any phase.
Table 30 Assignment of the current and corresponding reference voltage for directional
element
Phase Current Voltage
A Ia U bc
B Ib U ca
C Ic U ab
For three-phase short-circuit fault, without any healthy phase, memory

voltage values are used to determine direction if the measured voltage values
are not sufficient. During direction detection, if VT fail happens (a short circuit
or broken wire in the voltage transformer's secondary circuit or voltage
transformer fuse), maloperation may occur by directional overcurrent
elements if there is not any monitoring on the measured voltage. In such
situation, directional (if selected) overcurrent protection will be blocked.
1.2.4 Logic diagram
The logic diagram for Phase-A has been shown in the below figure. The logic
is valid for other phased in similar way.
107
Ia>I_OC1
OC1 Direction Off
OC1 Direction On
AND
Phase A forward
AND
VT fail
OC1 Inrush Block Off
<Imax_2H_UnBlk OC1 Inrush Block On

AND
Ia2/Ia1>
T_OC1
Func_OC1
OC1 Inrush Block Off AND Trip
OC1 Inrush Block On

Cross blocking
Ia2/Ia1 >
Ib2/Ib1 > OR
Ic2/Ic1 > AND Cross blocking
T2h_Cross_Blk<
Figure 37 Logic diagram for overcurrent protection
108
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
UP1 Trip 3Ph
UP2 Relay Block AR

OC1_Trip
UP3
OC2_Trip
OC Inv Trip
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description
IP1 Current input for phase A

IP2 Current input for phase B
IP3 Current input for phase C
Signal Description

st
OC1_Trip 1 stage OC trip
nd
OC2_Trip 2 stage OC trip
OC Inv Trip Time-inverse overcurrent trip
109
1.4.1 Setting list
Table 33 Overcurrent protection function setting list
Min. Max. Default setting

Setting Unit Description
(Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
current threshold of
I_OC1 A 0.08Ir 20Ir 2Ir
overcurrent stage 1
delay time of
T_OC1 s 0 60 0.1
overcurrent stage 1
overcurrent stage 2
delay time of
T_OC2 s 0 60 0.3
overcurrent stage 2
No.of inverse time
Curve_OC
1 12 1 characteristic curve
Inv
of overcurrent
start current of
I_OC Inv A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir inverse time
overcurrent
time multiplier of
customized inverse
K_OC Inv 0.05 999 1 time characteristic
curve for
overcurrent
time constant A of
customized inverse
A_OC Inv s 0 200 0.14 time characteristic
curve for
overcurrent
time constant B of
customized inverse
B_OC Inv s 0 60 0 time characteristic
curve for
overcurrent
index of customized
inverse time
P_OC Inv 0 10 0.02
characteristic curve
for overcurrent
the angle of
Degre bisector of
Angle_OC 0 90 60
e operation area of
overcurrent
110
Min. Max. Default setting

Setting Unit Description
(Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
directional element
the maximum
Imax_2H_Un
A 0.25 20Ir 5Ir current to release
Blk
harmornic block
ratio of 2rd
harmonic to
Ratio_I2/I1 0.07 0.5 0.2
fundamental
component
delay time of cross
T2h_Cross_B
s 0 60 1 block by 2rd
lk
harmormic
Table 34 Overcurrent protection binary setting list
Name Description
Func_OC1 Overcurrent stage 1 enabled or disabled

OC1 Direction Direction detection for overcurrent stage 1 enabled or disabled
OC1 Inrush Block Inrush restraint for overcurrent stage 1 enabled or disabled
Func_OC2 Overcurrent stage 2 enabled or disabled
OC2 Direction Direction of overcurrent stage 2 enabled or disabled
OC2 Inrush Block Inrush restraint for overcurrent stage 2 enabled or disabled
Func_OC Inv Time-Inverse stage for overcurrent enabled or disabled
OC Inv Direction Direction detection for inverse time stage enabled or disabled
OC Inv Inrush Block Inrush restraint for inverse time stage enabled or disabled
1.5 Reports
Information Description
OC1 Trip Overcurrent stage 1 trip

OC2 Trip Overcurrent stage 2 trip
OC Inv Trip Inverse time stage of overcurrent protection trip
1.6 Technical data
111
NOTE:
Table 36 Overcurrent protection technical data

Definite time characteristics
Current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
200% operating setting
Inverse time characteristics
IEC standard Normal inverse; ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
Very inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
Extremely inverse; with IEC60255-151
Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
Short inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20, in
Long inverse; accordance with ANSI/IEEE
C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
User-defined characteristic ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
T= <I/ISETTING < 20, in accordance
with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, 0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s
A
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005
Set time Multiplier for step 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01
n: k
Minimum operating time 20ms
Maximum operating time 100s
Reset mode instantaneous
Directional element
Operating area range 170° ≤ ±3°, at phase to phase
Characteristic angle 0°to 90°, step 1° voltage >1V
112
Table 37 Inrush restraint function
Item Range or value Tolerance

Upper function limit 0.25 Ir to 20.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting value or
Max current for inrush ±0.02Ir
restraint
nd
Ratio of 2 harmonic current 0.10 to 0.45, step 0.01
to fundamental component
current
Cross-block (IL1, IL2, IL3) 0.00s to 60.00 s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1% setting or +40ms
(settable time)
113
114
Chapter 7 Earth fault protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used for earth
fault portection.
115
1 Directional/Non-directional earth fault

portection
1.1 Introduction
In the grounded systems, extremely large fault resistances could cause

calculated impedance to be outside the fault detection characteristic of the
distance protection. Therefore, protection relay may not trip by distance
protection function and need to be supplemented by other protections. So,
the directional/non-directional earth fault protection function which can detect
reliably high resistance faults is required. The directional earth fault protection
allows the application of the protection IED also in systems where protection
coordination depends on both the magnitude of the fault current and the
direction of power flow to the fault location, for instance in case of parallel
lines. Generally directional/non-directional protection function features
following options:
 2 definite time stages and 1 inverse stage (covers all IEC/ANSI

characteristics)
 Individually selectable direction detection for each stage
 Negative sequence direction detection (selectable) in the cases that 3U0

is less than 1V and 3U2>3U0
 Individually selectable inrush blocking for each stage
 Inrush blocking using 2nd harmonic measured phase current
 VT fail monitoring for directional earth fault protection
Three earth fault protection stages are provided, two definite time stages and
one inverse time stage. All stages can operate in conjunction with the
116
integrated inrush restraint and directional functions.
Furthermore, the stages are independent from each other and can be
combined as desired. They can be enabled or disabled by dedicated binary
settings. These binary settings include ―Func_EF1‖, ―Func_EF2‖ and
―Func_EF Inv‖. For example, by applying setting ―1/on‖ to ―Func_EF1‖,
corresponding stage of earth fault protection would be enabled.
Individual pickup value for each definite stage can be defined by settings
―3I0_EF1‖ and ―3I0_EF2‖. By applying the settings, the measured zero
sequence current is compared separately with the setting value for each
stage. If the corresponding current is exceeded, startup signal will be
reported.
1.2.1 Time delays characteristic
The timer is set to count up for a pre-defined time delay. The time delay can
be set for each definite stage individually through settings ―T_EF1‖ and
―T_EF1‖. Accordingly, whenever the set time delays elapsed, a trip command
is issued.
For Time-inverse characteristic, the pickup value can be defined by setting

―3I0_EF Inv‖. The measured zero sequence current is compared with
corresponding setting value. If it exceeds the setting, related signal will be
reported and the tripping time is calculated according to the pre-defined
characteristic. The tripping curve can be set as IEC or ANSI standard curves
or any user-defined characteristic by following tripping time equation.
 
 
 A _ EF Inv 
T  P _ EF Inv
 B _ EF Inv   K _ EF INV
 i  
  I _ EF Inv  
  
Equation 22
where:
A_EF Inv: Time factor for inverse time stage
B_EF Inv: Time delay for inverse time stage
P_EF Inv: index for inverse time stage
117
K_EF Inv: Time multiplier
By applying the desired setting values, the device calculates the tripping time
from the zero sequence current. Once the calculated time elapsed, report ―EF
Inv Trip‖ will be issued.
1.2.2 Inrush restraint feature
The integrated earth fault protection may detect large magnetizing inrush
currents when a power transformer installed at downstream path is energized.
The inrush current may be several times of the nominal current, and may last
from several tens of milliseconds to several seconds. Inrush current
comprises second harmonic as well as a considerable fundamental
component.
It is possible to apply the inrush restraint feature separately to each definite

stage and inverse time-current stage of earth fault element by using binary
setting ―EF1 Inrush Block‖, ―EF2 Inrush Block‖ and ―EF Inv Inrush Block‖. By
applying setting ―1/on‖ to the binary settings, no trip command will be issued,
if an inrush condition is detected.
Since the inrush current contains a relatively large second harmonic

component which is nearly absent during a fault current, the inrush restraint
operates based on the evaluation of the second harmonic content which is
present in the phase currents. Generally, inrush restraint for earth fault
protection is performed based on the second harmonic contents of three
phase currents.
The inrush condition is recognized if the ratio of second harmonic content in

each phase current to their fundamental component exceeds setting value
―Ratio_I2/I1‖. The setting is applicable to the both definite stages of earth fault
protection element as well as the inverse time-current stage. As soon as the
measured ratio exceeds the set threshold, a blocking is applied to those
stages whose corresponding binary setting is considered to be block mode.
Furthermore, if the fundamental component of each phase current exceeds
the upper limit value ―Imax_2H_UnBlk‖, the inrush restraint will no longer be
effective, since a high-current fault is assumed in this case. Figure 38 shows
the logic of inrush restraint feature applied to earth fault protection. It is based
on phase currents and can be applied to any stage individually.
118
Max(Ia1,Ib1,Ic1) <
Imax_2H_UnBlk
A
Max(Ia2/Ia1, Ib2/Ib1, N Inrush BLK 3I0
Ic2/Ic1)>Ratio_I2/I1 D
Figure 38 Inrush restraint blocking logic
1.2.3 Earth fault direction determination
The integrated directional function can be applied to each stage of earth fault
element via individual binary settings. These control words include ―EF1
Direction‖, ―EF2 Direction‖ and ―EF Inv Direction‖. There are two possibilities
for direction determination of earth faults. The first is based on zero sequence
components and the second is based on negative sequence components.
The following subsections go on to demonstrate basic principle of the two
methods.
1.2.3.1 Zero sequence directional component
In this method, the direction determination is performed by comparing the

zero sequence quantities. In current path, the measured IN current is valid
when the neutral current is connected to the device. In the voltage path, the
calculated zero sequence voltage (3U0) is used as reference voltage. This
can be performed when 3U0 magnitude is larger than 1V.
In order to satisfy different network conditions and applications, the reference

voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle ―Angle_EF‖ between 0° and 90° in
clockwise direction (negative sign). It should be noted that the settings affect
all the directional stages of earth fault element. In this way, the vector of
rotated reference voltage can be closely adjusted to the vector of fault current
-3I0 which lags the fault voltage 3U0 by the fault angle Φd. This would provide
the best possible result for the direction determination. The rotated reference
voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is the range
between -80°and +80°of the rotated reference voltage. If the vector of the
fault current -3I0 is in this area, the device detects forward direction.
Figure 39 shows an example of direction determination for a fault in phase A.

As can be seen from the figure, fault current 3I0 lags from fault voltage Va.
Accordingly, fault current -3I0 lags residual sequence voltage 3U0 by this
angle. The reference voltage 3U0 is rotated to be as close as possible to -3I0
current. Furthermore, the forward area is depicted in the figure.
119
90°
3I 0
0°
3U 0_Ref
Angle_EF
Angle_Range
EF
Forward Bisector
-3 I 0
Figure 39 Characteristic of zero sequence directional element
where:
Angle_EF: The settable characteristic angle
Angle_Range EF: 80º
1.2.3.2 Negative sequence directional component
This method is particularly suitable when the zero sequence voltage has a
small magnitude, for instance when a considerable zero sequence mutual
coupling exists between parallel lines or when there is an unfavorable zero
sequence impedance. In such cases it may be desirable to determine
direction of fault current by using negative sequence components. To do so, it
is required to set binary setting ―EF U2/I2 Dir‖ to ―1/On‖. By applying this
setting, the direction determination of earth fault current is performed by
default using the zero sequence components. However, when the magnitude
of zero sequence voltage falls below permissible threshold of 1V and
negative sequence voltage is larger that 2V, the direction determination turns
to use the negative sequence components. In this case, the direction
determination is performed by comparing the negative sequence system
quantities. To do so, three times of the calculated negative sequence current
3I2 (3I2=IA+a2IB+aIC) is compared with three times of the calculated
negative sequence voltage 3V2 (3U2=UA+a2UB+aUC) as reference voltage,
where a is equal to 120°.
On the contrary, by applying setting ―0/Off‖ to the binary setting ―EF U2/I2 Dir‖,
the direction of earth fault current is only determined by using the zero
120
sequence components. In this regard, if the zero sequence voltage has a

magnitude larger than 1V, proper determination of fault direction is warranted.
The fault current -3I2 lags from the voltage 3U2. To satisfy different
applications, the reference voltage can be rotated by adjustable angle
―Angle_adjust_Neg‖ between 50°and 90°in clockwise direction (negative
sign) to be as close as possible to the vector of fault current -3I2. This would
provide the best possible outcome for the direction determination. The rotated
reference voltage defines the forward and reverse area. The forward area is
the range between -80°and +80°of the rotated reference voltage. If the
vector of the fault current -3I2 is in this area, the device detects forward
direction. Below figure shows an example of direction determination for a fault
in phase A.
3I2 90°
0°
3 U 2_ Ref
Angle_Neg
Angle_Range
Neg
Forward
-3 I 2 Bisector
Figure 40 Characteristic of negative sequence directional element
where:
Angle_Neg: The settable characteristic angle
Angle_Range Neg: 80º
During direction decision, a VT Fail condition may result in false or undesired

tripping by directional earth fault element. Therefore occurance of the VT Fail,
directional earth fault protection will be blocked.
1.2.4 Logic diagram
The tripping logics of directional/non-directional earth fault protection are
121
shown in below figure. As shown, the tripping logic of the earth fault protection
will be affected individually by inrush and direction criteria. Whenever the zero
sequence current exceeds the related setting value and other mentioned
criteria is satisfied, corresponding timer will be started and tripping command
will be generated by expiring the time setting.
Forward direction（by zero

sequence direction element）
3U0<1V
A O Forward
Forward direction（by N R
negative sequence direction D
element）
EF U2/I2 Dir on
Figure 41 Logic for directiion determination
3I0 > 3I0_EF1

EF1 Inrush Block off
―0‖
Inrush BLK 3I0
EF1 Inrush Block on
EF1 Direction off A Func_EF1 on

―1‖ N T_EF1 EF1 Trip
Forward D
EF1 Direction on
Figure 42 Tripping logic of the first stage of definite earth fault protection
3I0 > 3I0_EF2

EF2 Inrush Block off
―0‖
Inrush BLK 3I0
EF2 Inrush Block on
EF2 Direction off A Func_EF2 on

―1‖ N T_EF2 EF2 Trip
Forward D
EF2 Direction on
122
Figure 43 Tripping logic of the second stage of definite earth fault protection
3I0 > 3I0_INV

EF Inv Inrush Block off
―0‖
Inrush BLK 3I0
EF Inv Inrush Block on
EF Inv Direction off Func_EF Inv on

A
―1‖ N EF_INV Trip
Forward D
EF Inv Direction on
Figure 44 Tripping logic of the inverse stage of earth fault protection
The whole tripping logics for EF1 and EF2 are the same as Figure 45, if
binary setting of ―EF1 Init AR‖ and ―EF2 Init AR‖ are enabled respectively.
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
IN Trip 3Ph
UP1 Relay Block AR
UP2 EF1_Trip
UP3 EF2_Trip
EF Inv_Trip
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description
IP1 Phase-A current input

IP2 Phase-B current input
IP3 Phase-C current input
UP1 Phase-A voltage input
UP2 Phase-B voltage input
123
Signal Description
UP3 Phase-C voltage input
Signal Description

st
EF1_Trip 1 stage EF Trip
nd
EF2_Trip 2 stage EF Trip
EF Inv_Trip Inverse time stage EF Trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 40 EF protection function setting list
Default
Min. Max.
setting
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/1A (Ir:5A/ Description
(Ir:5A/1
) 1A)
A)
3I0_EF1 A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.5Ir threshold of earth fault
protection stage 1
delay time of earth fault
T_EF1 s 0 60 0.1
protection stage 1
protection stage 2
T_EF2 s 0 60 0.3
protection stage 2
124
Default
Min. Max.
setting
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/1A (Ir:5A/ Description
(Ir:5A/1
) 1A)
A)
No. of inverse time
Curve_EF Inv 1 12 1 characteristic curve of earth
fault protection
start current of inverse time
3I0_EF Inv A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir
earth fault protection
time multiplier of customized
inverse time characteristic
K_EF Inv 0.05 999 1
curve for earth fault
protection
time constant A of
customized inverse time
A_EF Inv s 0 200 0.14
characteristic curve for earth
fault protection
time constant B of
B_EF Inv s 0 60 0
characteristic curve for earth
fault protection
index of customized inverse
P_EF Inv 0 10 0.02 time characteristic curve for
earht fault protection
the angle of bisector of
Angle_EF Degree 0 90 70 operation area of zero
sequnce directional element
Angle_Neg Degree 50 90 70 operation area of negative
Table 41 EF protection binary setting list
Operation for the first

Func_EF1 definite stage of the 1 0 1
Directional mode for
the first definite stage
EF1 Direction 1 0 1
of the earth fault
protection
EF1 Inrush Block Inrush restraint mode 1 0 1
125
for the first definite

stage of the earth fault
protection
Operation for the
second definite stage
Func_EF2 1 0 1
of the earth fault
protection
the first definite stage
EF2 Direction 1 0 1
of the earth fault
protection
Inrush restraint mode
for the second definite
EF2 Inrush Block 1 0 1
protection
Operation for the
time-inverse stage of
Func_EF Inv 1 0 1
the earth fault
protection
the time-inverse stage
EF Inv Direction 0 0 1
of the earth fault
protection
Inrush restraint mode
for the time-inverse
EF Inv Inrush Block 0 0 1
protection
Negative-sequence
direction detection
EF U2/I2 Dir 0 0 1
element for earth fault
protection
Auto-reclosure
initiated by the first
EF1 Init AR 0 0 1
definite stage of the
Auto-reclosure
initiated by the first
EF2 Init AR 0 0 1
definite stage of the
126
1.4.2 Setting calculation example
A B
C
127km 139km
21/21N
21/21N
PTR:400/0.1kV
CTR:2000/5
Figure 46 400kV Overhead transmission line protection relay setting
Here, a typical setting calculation of the inverse stage of the earth fault
protection is presented. The characteristic is selected as IEC Normal Inverse.
Additionally the function is set for operation in forward direction.
It is assumed that maximum transmission power is equal to: 250 MVA
Assuming a safety factor of 20% corresponds to Imax-Prim = 433 A
3I0inv prim = 0.3× Imax-Prim，
So,
3I0_EF Inv =0.32 A
By comparing the IEC Normal Inverse characteristic and IED setting values
are considered as follows:
3I0_EF Inv 0.32A
Curve_EF Inv 1(IEC Normal Invers)
Inrush detection for Iverse stage active
Directional (forward) for Iverse stage Yes
3U2/3I2 direction in addition to 3U0/3I0 Yes
1.5 Reports
127
st
EF1 Trip 1 stage EF Trip
nd
EF2 Trip 2 stage EF Trip
EF Inv Trip Inverse time stage EF Trip
Func_EF On EF function on
Func_EF Off EF function off
Func_EF Inv On Inverse stage EF function on
Func_EF Inv Off Inverse stage EF function off
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 44 Earth fault protection (ANSI 50N, 51N, 67N)
Item Rang or value Tolerance

Definite time characteristic
0.00 to 60.00s, step ≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at 200%
Time delay
0.01s operating setting
IEC standard Normal inverse; IEC60255-151
Very inverse; ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
Extremely inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20
Long inverse
ANSI Inverse; ANSI/IEEE C37.112,
Short inverse; ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
Long inverse; <I/ISETTING < 20
Moderately inverse;
128
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic IEC60255-151
T= ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
<I/ISETTING < 20
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step
0.001s
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step
0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step
0.005
set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01
Directional element
Operating area range of zero ≤ ±3°, at 3U0≥1V
160°
sequence directional element
Characteristic angle 0°to 90°, step 1°
Operating area range of ≤ ±3°, at 3U2≥2V
negative sequence directional 160°
element
Characteristic angle 50°to 90°, step 1°
129
130
Chapter 8 Emergency/backup overcurrent
and earth fault protection
Chapter 8 Emergency/backup
overcurrent and earth fault
protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data included in
emergency/backup overcurrent and earth fault protection.
131
1 Emergency/backup overcurrent
protection
1.1 Introduction
In the case of VT Fail condition, all distance zones and protection functions
related with voltage input are out of service. In this case, an emergency
overcurrent protection comes into operation.
Additionally, the protection can be set as backup non-directional overcurrent

protection according to the user’s requirement.
In case of emergency mode of operation, the function VT Fail supervision

function should be enabled.
The protection provides following features:
 One definite time stage
 One inverse time stage
 all kinds of IEC and ANSI time-inverse characteristics curve as well as

optional user defined characteristic
 Inrush restraint function can be set for each stage separately
 Cross blocking of inrush detection
1.2.1 Tripping time characteristic
The tripping time can be set as definite time delay or time-inverse

characteristic. All (11) kinds of time-inverse characteristics are available. It is
also possible to create a user-defined time characteristic. Each stage can
operate in conjunction with the integrated inrush restraint which operates
based on measured phase currents.Each phase current is compared with the
corresponding setting value and related delay time. If currents exceed the
associated pickup value, the trip command is issued after expiry of the set
time delay.
132
Time-inverse characteristic is set according to the following equation:
 
 
 A _ EM / BU OC Inv 
T  P _ EM / BU OC Inv
 B _ EM / BU OC Inv   K _ EM / BU OC INV
 i  
  I _ EM / BU OC Inv  
  
where:
A_Em/BU OC Inv: Coefficient setting for emergency inverse time overcurrent
B_Em/BU OC Inv: Time delay setting for emergency inverse time overcurrent
P_Em/BU OC Inv: Index for inverse time overcurrent
K_Em/BU OC Inv: Multiplier setting for emergency inverse time overcurrent
from the measured current. Once the calculated time elapsed, repoprt
―Em/Bu OC Trip‖ will be issued.
The protection IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during
transformer energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental
current, inrush current comprises large second harmonic current which does
not appear in short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may affect the
protection functions which operate based on the fundamental component of
the measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is provided to
prevent emergency/backup overcurrent protection from maloperation.
The inrush restraint feature operates based on evaluation of the 2nd harmonic
content which is present in measured current. The inrush condition is
recognized if the ratio of second harmonic current to fundamental component
exceeds the corresponding setting value. The setting value is applicable for
both definite time stage and inverse time stage. The inrush restraint feature
will be performed as soon as the ratio exceeds the set threshold.
Furthermore, by recognition of the inrush current in one phase, it is possible

to set the protection in a way that not only the phase with the considerable
inrush current, but also the other phases of the protection are blocked for a
certain time. This is achieved by cross-blocking feature integrated in the IED.
The inrush restraint function has a maximum inrush current setting. Once the
133
measuring current exceeds the setting, the protection will not be blocked any
longer.
1.2.3 Logic diagram
Ia>I_Em/BU OC
Func_Em/BU OC
VT fail A
Func_BU OC on N
D
Em/BU OC Inrush Block Off
Ia<Imax_2H_UnBlk A Em/BU OC Inrush Block On

N
Ia2/Ia1>Ratio_I2/I1 D
T_Em/BU OC
O Trip
Em/BU OC Inrush Block Off
R
Em/BU OC Inrush Block On

Cross blocking
Max{Ia, Ib,
Ic}<Imax_2H_UnBlk A
T2h_Cross_Blk
N Cross blocking
D
Ia2/Ia1 >
O
Ib2/Ib1 > R
Ic2/Ic1 >
Figure 47 Emergency/backup protection function logic diagram
134
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
Trip 3Ph
UP1
Relay Block AR
UP2
Em/BU OC1_Trip
UP3
Em/BU OCInv_Trip
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description

Signal Description

st
Em/BU OC1_Trip 1 stage emergency OC trip
Em/BU OCInv_Trip Time-inverse emergency OC trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
135
Table 47 Funciton setting list for emergency/backup overcurrent protection
Max.
Min. Default
(Ir:5
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/ setting Description
A/1A
1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
)
I_Em/BU OC A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir emergency/backup overcurrent
stage 1
delay time of emergency/backup
T_Em/BU OC s 0 60 0.3
overcurrent stage 1
No.of inverse time characteristic
Curve_Em/BU OC
1 12 1 curve of emergency/backup
Inv
overcurrent
I_Inv_Em/BU OC A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir
emergency/backup overcurrent
K_Em/BU OC Inv 0.05 999 1 inverse time characteristic curve
for emergency/backup overcurrent
time constant A of customized
A_Em/BU OC Inv s 0 200 0.14 inverse time characteristic curve
time constant B of customized
B_Em/BU OC Inv s 0 60 0 inverse time characteristic curve
index of customized inverse time
P_Em/BU OC Inv 0 10 0.02 characteristic curve for
emergency/backup overcurrent
the maximum current to release
Imax_2H_UnBlk A 0.25 20Ir 5Ir
harmornic block
ratio of 2rd harmonic to
Ratio_I2/I1 0.07 0.5 0.2
fundamental component
delay time of cross block by 2rd
T2h_Cross_Blk s 0 60 1
harmormic
Table 48 Binary setting list for emergency/backup overcurrent protection
Name Description
Func_BU OC Backup overcurrent protection enabled or disabled

Func_Em/BU OC Emergency overcurrent protection stage 1 enabled or disabled
Inrush restraint of emergency/backup overcurrent protection
Em/BU OC Inrush Block
stage 1 enabled or disabled
136
Name Description
Inverse time stage of emergency overcurrent protection enabled

Func_Em/BU OC Inv
or disabled
Em/BU OC Inv Inrush Inrush restraint of emergency/backup overcurrent protection for
Block inverse stage enabled or disabled
1.5 Reports
Em/Bu OC Trip Emergency/backup overcurrent protection trip

Em/Bu OCInv Trip Emergency/backup overcurrent protection inverse time stage trip
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 50 Emergency/backup overcurrent protection technical data

Definite time characteristics
≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Long inverse
C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
137
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
User-defined characteristic ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, 0.005 to 200.0s, step 0.001s
A
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step 0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step 0.005
Set time Multiplier for step 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01
n: k
138
2 Emergency/backup earth fault

protection
2.1 Introduction
In the case of VT Fail condition, all distance protection element and protection
functions relating with voltage input are out of operation. In this case an
emergency earth fault protection can come into operation.
Additionally, the protection can be set as backup non directional earth fault
protection according to the user’s requirement.
In case of emergency mode of operation, the function VT Fail supervision

should beenabled.
The protection provides following features:
 One definite time stage
 One inverse time stage
 All kinds of IEC and ANSI inverse characteristics curve as well as

optional user defined characteristic
 Inrush restraint can be selected individually for each stage
 CT secondary circuit supervision for earth fault protection. Once CT

failure happens, all stages will be blocked
 Zero-sequence current is obtained from external input
2.2.1 Tripping time characteristic
The tripping time can be set as definite time delay or time-inverse

characteristic. All (11) kinds of time-inverse characteristics are available. It is
also possible to create a user-defined time character
ristic. Each stage can operate in conjunction with the integrated inrush
restraint which operates based on measured phase currents. The external
input earth current is compared with the corresponding setting value and
139
related delay time. If current exceed the associated pickup value, the trip
command is issued after expiry of the set time delay.
Time-inverse characteristic is set according to the following equation:
 
 
 A _ EM / BU EF Inv 
T  P _ EM / BU EF Inv
 B _ EM / BU EF Inv   K _ EM / BU EF INV
 i  
  I _ EM / BU EF Inv  
  
where:
A_Em/BU EF Inv: Coefficient setting for emergency zero-sequence inverse

time
B_Em/BU OC Inv: Time delay setting for emergency zero-sequence inverse

time
P_Em/BU OC Inv: Index for emergency zero-sequence inverse time
K_Em/BU OC Inv: Multiplier setting for emergency zero-sequence inverse

time
from the measured current. Once the calculated time elapsed, repoprt
―Em/Bu EF Trip‖ will be issued.
The IED may detect large magnetizing inrush currents during transformer
energizing. In addition to considerable unbalance fundamental current, inrush
current comprises large second harmonic current which does not appear in
short circuit current. Therefore, the inrush current may affect the protection
functions which operate based on the fundamental component of the
measured current. Accordingly, inrush restraint logic is provided to prevent
emergency/backup earth fault protection from maloperation.
The inrush restraint feature operates based on evaluation of the 2nd

harmonic content which is present in measured current. The inrush condition
is recognized when the ratio of second harmonic current to fundamental
component exceeds the corresponding setting value for each phase. The
setting value is applicable for both definite time stage and inverse time stage.
The inrush restraint feature will be performed as soon as the ratio exceeds
the set threshold.
140
The inrush restraint function has a maximum inrush current setting. Once the
measuring current exceeds the setting, the protection will not be blocked any
longer.
2.2.3 Logic diagram
3I0>3I0_Em/BU EF
Func_Em/BU EF on
VT fail A T_Em/BU EF
Func_BU EF on N Trip
D
Em/BU EF Inrush Block Off

<Imax_2H_UnBlk A
N
Em/BU EF Inrush Block On
Ratio_I2/I1> D
Figure 48 Emergency/backup earth fault protection logic diagram
IP1 Trip PhA
IP2 Trip PhB

IP3 Trip PhC
IN Trip 3Ph
UP1 Relay Block AR

Em/Bu EF Trip
UP2
UP3 Em/Bu EFInv Trip
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description

141
Signal Description

Signal Description

Em/Bu EF Trip Emergency/Backup Earth Fault Trip
Emergency/Backup Earth Fault inverse time
Em/BU EFInv_Trip
Trip
2.4.1 Setting list
Table 53 Emergency/backup earth fault protection function setting list
Min. Default
Un Max.
Setting (Ir:5A/1 setting Description
it (Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
3I0_Em/BU EF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir threshold of earth fault
protection stage 1
T_Em/BU EF s 0 60 0.3
protection stage 1
No. of inverse time
Curve_Em/BU characteristic curve of
1 12 1
EF Inv emergency/backup earth
fault protection
142
Min. Default
Un Max.
Setting (Ir:5A/1 setting Description
it (Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
3I0_Inv_Em/BU
A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir emergency/backup earth
EF
fault protection
K_Em/BU EF Inv 0.05 999 1
curve for emergency/backup
time constant A of
A_Em/BU EF Inv s 0 200 0.14 characteristic curve for
emergency/backup earth
fault protection
time constant B of
B_Em/BU EF Inv s 0 60 0 characteristic curve for
emergency/backup earth
fault protection
time characteristic curve for
P_Em/BU EF Inv 0 10 0.02
emergency/backup earht
fault protection
the maximum current to

release harmornic block

Ratio_I2/I1 0.07 0.5 0.2
Table 54 Emergency/backup earth fault protection binary setting list
Name Description
Func_BU EF Backup earth fault protection enabled or disabled

Func_Em/BU EF Emergency earth fault protection enabled or disabled
Inrush restraint of emergency earth fault protection enabled or
Em/BU EF Inrush Block
disabled
Inverse time stage of emergency earth fault protection enabled or
Func_Em/BU EF Inv
disabled
Em/BU EF Inv Inrush Inrush restraint of emergency earth fault protection inverse stage
Block enabled or disabled
143
2.5 IED report
Em/Bu EF Trip Emergency/backup earth fault protection trip

Em/Bu EFInv Trip Emergency/backup earth fault protection inverse time stage trip
2.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 56 Technical data for emergency/backup earth fault protection
Item Rang or value Tolerance

Definite time characteristic
0.00 to 60.00s, step ≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at 200%
Time delay
0.01s operating setting
Long inverse
C37.112,
Moderately inverse;
Very inverse;
Extremely inverse;
Definite inverse
user-defined characteristic ≤ ±5% setting + 40ms, at 2
with IEC60255-151
Time factor of inverse time, A 0.005 to 200.0s, step
0.001s
144
Delay of inverse time, B 0.000 to 60.00s, step
0.01s
Index of inverse time, P 0.005 to 10.00, step
0.005
set time Multiplier for step n: k 0.05 to 999.0, step 0.01
145
146
Chapter 9 Switch-onto-fault
protection
Chapter 9 Switch-Onto-Fault
protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data included in
Switch-Onto-Fault protection function.
147
protection
1 Switch-Onto-Fault protection
1.1 Introduction
The IED has a high speed switch-onto-fault protection function to clear

immediately faults on the feeders that are switched onto a high-current short
circuit. Its main application may be in the case that a feeder is energized
when the earth switch is closed.
1.2 Function principle
1.2.1 Function description
Switch-onto-fault protection can be enabled by binary setting ―SOTF FUNC‖.

If this is set to ―1/on‖, switch-onto-fault protection will be active. Conversely,
setting ―SOTF FUNC‖ to ―0/ off‖ will disable the function. The energization of
the feeder is determined by the circuit breaker state recognition function. The
prerequisite for switch-onto-fault operation is that circuit breaker has been
open for 10 seconds, or the binary input ―MC/AR Block‖changes from 1 to 0.
SOTF function will be active after rising edge of receiving signal ―MC/AR
block‖ and if relay does not startup. The SOTF sequence will be inactive 1
second after falling edge of signal ―MC/AR block‖ ‖ if no fault has been
occured in the system.
SOTF protection operates based on three elements: distance protection,

overcurrent protection and zero sequence (earth fault) protection.
Distance element of switch-onto-fault protection will trip instantaneously,

without any delay time, if calculated impedance lies in the protected zones
(zone 1, zone 2 or zone 3) and the maximum {Ia(b,c)}>I_SOTF_Dist. In
addition, switch-onto-fault protection is supplemented by overcurrent and
earth fault protections, and can generate trip command after settable delay
times (―T_OC_SOTF‖ and ―T_EF_SOTF‖). For ―T_EF_SOTF‖, since IED
needs to consider that three phases of CB are not closed at the same time, it
is recommended to set this value. (Besides, the program has already
considered 40ms time delay itself. ) Overcurrent elements works based on
maximum measured phase currents and will trip after related delay time if
maximum phase current exceeds setting ―I_SOTF‖. Similarly, earth fault
protection operates if measured zero sequence current exceeds setting value
148
protection
of ―3I0_SOTF‖.
Additionally, it can be selected that overcurrent and earth fault element of switch-onto-fault
protection to be blocked in the case of inrush current. If binary setting ―SOTF Inrush Block‖
set to ―1/on‖, blocking will be applied to distance zone 2, zone 3, overcurrent and earth fault
element. Setting to ―0/off‖ will lead to ignoring of the inrush blocking for switch-onto-fault
function. Similarly, if the measured current value exceeds the setting ―Imax_2H_UnBlk‖, it
is assumed that a short circuit happened and inrush blocking will not be considered.
Figure 49 shows the tripping logic diagram of switch-onto-fault protection.
1.2.2 Logic diagram
Func_SOTF on
BI“MC/AR Block”1 to 0
O
R
BI “PhA CB Open”0 to 1
BI “PhB CB Open”0 to 1
A 10s
N
BI “PhC CB Open”0 to 1 D
Relay Startup
A
Trip
N
Relay startup D
Impedance within
zone1,2,3
Over current O
T_OC_SOTF
operation R A
Zero-sequence N
T_EF_SOTF
operation D
T_Relay Reset Relay reset
SOTF Inrush Block Off
SOTF Inrush Block On

Cross blocking
A
N
No fault D
Figure 49 SOTF protection logic
149
protection
IP1 Relay Block AR

IP2 SOTF Trip
IP3 Relay Startup
IN Relay Trip
UP1
UP2
UP3
PhA CB Open
PhB CB Open
PhC CB Open
MC/AR Block
Signal Description

Signal Description
PhA CB Open PhaseA CB open

PhB CB Open PhaseB CB open
PhC CB Open PhaseC CB open
MC/AR Block AR block
Signal Description
150
protection
Signal Description

SOTF Trip SOTF Trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 60 SOTF protection function setting list
Default
Uni Min. Max.
Setting setting Description
t (Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
(Ir:5A/1A)
phase current threshold of
I_SOTF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 2Ir overcurrent element of
switch onto fault protection
delay time of overcurrent
T_OC_SOT
s 0 60 0 element of switch onto fault
F
protection
zero sequnce current
3I0_SOTF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.5Ir threshold of switch onto fault
protection
delay time of zero sequce
T_EF_SOTF s 0 60 0.1 overcurrent of switch onto
fault protection
Table 61 SOTF protection binary setting list
SOTF protection
Func_SOTF 1 0 1
operating mode
SOTF protection
SOTF Inrush Block 1 0 1
blocked by inrush
151
protection
1.4.2 Setting calculation example
The data related to 400kV overhead line are used here to set overcurrent
and zero-sequence element of SOTF function.It is assumed that maximum
transmission power is equal to: 250 MVA
Assuming a safety factor of 20% corresponds to Imax-Prim =433 A
I>>> prim=2.0 × Imax-Prim
So,
I>>> sec=2.17A
3I0>>> prim=0.3 × Imax-Prim
So, 3I0>>> sec= 0.32A
High Speed SOTF-O/C is ON
I>>> Pickup 2.17A
3I0>>> Pickup 0.32A
Time for I>>> SOTF 0.00sec
Time for 3I0>>> SOTF 0.00sec
Inrush detection for SOTF current active
1.5 Reports
Dist SOTF Ttrip Distance relay speed up trip after switching on to fault (SOTF)
EF SOTF Trip Earth Fault relay speed up after SOTF
OC SOTF Trip Overcurrent relay speed up after SOTF
152
protection
Func_SOTF On SOTF function on

Func_SOTF Off SOTF function off
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 64 Switch-onto-fault protection technical data

Phase current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
Zero-sequence current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
Time delay of phase 0.00s to 60.00s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at
overcurrent 200% operating setting
Time delay of zero sequence 0.00s to 60.00s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1% setting or +40ms, at
current 200% operating setting
153
protection
154
Chapter 10 Overload protection
About this chapter

overload protection function.
155
1 Overload protection
In some applications, the load is flowing through the feeder can be so

important for operator of the system to consider corrective actions. Therefore,
the IED can supervise load flow in real time. If allof the phase currents are
greater than the dedicated setting, the protection will report an overload alarm
when the time setting ―T_OL Alarm‖ has been elapsed.
1.1.2 Logic diagram
Ia>I_OL Alarm
O T_OL Alarm
Ib>I_OL Alarm
R
A
Ic>I_OL Alarm
Func_OL on N Trip
D
Figure 50 Logic diagram for overload protection
IP1
IP2
IP3
Signal Description
156
Signal Description

1.3.1 Setting lists
Table 66 Function setting list for overload protection
Default
Min.
Uni Max. setting
Setting (Ir:5A/1A Description
t (Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1
)
A)
current threshold of overload
I_OL Alarm A 0.08Ir 20Ir 2Ir
alarm
T_OL
s 0.1 6000 20 delay time of overload alarm
Alarm
Table 67 Binary setting list for overload protection
Name Description
Func_OL Overload function enabled or disabled
1.4 Reports
Table 68 Alarm information list
Overload Alarm Overload protection alarm
157
158
Chapter 11 Overvoltage protection
About this chapter

overvoltage protection.
159
1 Overvoltage protection
1.1 Introduction
Voltage protection has the function to protect electrical equipment against

overvoltage condition. Abnormally high voltages often occur e.g. in low
loaded, long distance transmission lines, in islanded systems when generator
voltage regulation fails, or after full load shutdown of a generator from the
system. Even if compensation reactors are used to avoid line overvoltage by
compensation of the line capacitance and thus reduction of the overvoltage,
the overvoltage will endanger the insulation if the reactors fail (e.g. fault
clearance). The line must be disconnected within very short time.
The protection provides the following features:
 Two definite time stages
 Each stage can be set to alarm or trip
 Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase

(selectable)
 Settable dropout ratio
1.2.1 Phase to phase overvoltage protection
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with
the corresponding setting value. If a phase voltage exceeds the set
thresholds, ―U_OV1‖ or ―U_OV2‖, after expiry of the time delays, ―T_OV1’ or
―T_OV2‖, the protection IED will issue alarm signal or trip command
according to the user’s requirement.
There are two stages included in overvoltage protection, each stage can be
set to alarm or trip separately in binary setting, and the time delay for each
stage can be individually set. Thus, the alarming or tripping can be
time-coordinated based on how severe the voltage increase, e.g. in case of
160
high overvoltage, the trip command will be issued with a short time delay,
whereas for the less severe overvoltage, trip or alarm signal can be issued
with a longer time delay.
Additionaly, the dropout ratio of the overvoltage protection can be set in

setting ―Dropout_OV‖. Therefore, the trip command of overvoltage is reset if
the measured voltage comes bellow the ratio value mentioned in this setting.
1.2.2 Phase to earth overvlotage protection
The phase to earth overvoltage protection operates just like the phase to
phase protection except that it detects phase to earth voltages.
1.2.3 Logic diagram
Ua>U_OV1
O OV PE on
Ub>U_OV1
R
Uc>U_OV1
OV Trip on
Trip
Uab>U_OV1
O
T_OV
Ubc>U_OV1 O R
OV PE off
R OV Trip off
Alarm
Uca>U_OV1
Figure 51 Logic diagram for overvoltage protection
161
UP1 Trip PhA
UP2 Trip PhB

UP3 Trip PhC
Trip 3Ph
Relay Block AR
OV1 Alarm
OV2 Alarm
OV1_Trip
OV2_Trip
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description

Signal Description

st
OV1 Alarm 1 stage OV alarm
nd
OV2 Alarm 2 stage OV alarm
st
OV1_Trip 1 stage OV trip
nd
OV2_Trip 2 stage OV trip
162
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 71 Function setting list for overvoltage protection
Parameter Range Default Unit Description
Voltage setting for overvoltage protection

U_OV1 40~200 65 V
stage 1
Time setting for overvoltage protection
T_OV1 0~60 0.3 s
stage 1
Voltage setting for overvoltage protection
U_OV2 40~200 63 V
stage 2
Time setting for overvoltage protection
T_OV2 0~60 0.6 s
stage 2
Dropout_OV 0.9~0.99 0.95 Dropout ratio for overvoltage protection
Table 72 Binary setting list for overvoltage protection
Name Description
Func_OV1 First stage overvoltage protection operating mode

OV1 Trip First stage overvoltage protection trip/alarm mode
Func_OV2 Second stage overvoltage protection operating mode
OV2 Trip Second stage overvoltage protection trip/alarm mode
OV PE Overvoltage protection based on phase-to-earth voltage
1.5 Reports
OV1 Trip Overvoltage stage 1 trip

OV2 Trip Overvoltage stage 2 trip
163
OV1 Alarm Overvoltage stage 1 alarm

OV2 Alarm Overvoltage stage 2 alarm
1.6 Technical data
Table 75 Technical data for overvoltage protection

Voltage connection Phase-to-phase voltages or ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage 40 to 100 V, step 1 V ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
Phase to phase voltage 80 to 200 V, step 1 V ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
Reset ratio 0.90 to 0.99, step 0.01 ≤ ±3 % setting
Time delay 0.00 to 60.00 s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1 % setting or +50 ms, at
Reset time <40ms
164
Chapter 12 Undervoltage protection
About this chapter

undervoltage protection function.
165
1 Undervoltage protection
1.1 Introduction
Voltage protection has the function to protect electrical equipment against

undervoltage. The protection can detect voltage collapse on transmission
lines to prevent unwanted operation condition and stability problems.
The protection provides the following features:
 Two definite time stages
 Each stage can be set to alarm or trip
 Measuring voltage between phase-earth voltage and phase-phase

(selectable)
 Current criteria supervision
 Circuit breaker aux. contact supervision
 VT secondary circuit supervision, the undervoltage function will be

blocked when VT failure happens
 Settable dropout ratio, both for single phase and three phases
1.2.1 Phase to phase underovltage protection
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with
the corresponding setting value. If one phase voltage or three phase voltages
(by ―UV PE‖ and ―UV Chk All Phase‖) falls below the set thresholds, ―U_UV1‖
or ―U_UV2‖, after expiry of the time delays, ―T_OV1’ or ―T_OV2‖, the
protection IED will issue alarm signal or trip command according to the user’s
requirement.
There are two stages included in overvoltage protection; each stage can be
set to alarm or trip separately by binary settings, ―UV1 Trip‖ and ―UV2 Trip‖.
Thus, the alarming or tripping can be time-coordinated based on how severe
the voltage collapse, e.g. in case of severe undervoltage happens, the trip
166
command will be issued with a short time delay, whereas for the less severe
undervoltage, trip or alarm signal can be issued with a longer time delay.
The undervoltage protection integrated can also be set for selection of the
measureing quantities. In this way, the user can select that the undervoltage
detection occurs when at least one phase sees voltage reduction or the
reduction of voltage should occur in all three phases. This feature can be
selected using binary setting ―UV Chk All Phase‖.
Additionaly, the dropout ratio of the undervoltage protection can be set in

setting ―Dropout_UV‖. Therefore, the trip command of overvoltage is reset if
the measured voltage comes bellow the ratio value mentioned in this setting.
1.2.2 Phase to earth undervoltage protection
The phase to earth undervoltage protection operates just like the phase to
phase protection except that the quantities considered are phase to earth
voltages.
1.2.3 Depending on the VT location
Depending on the configuration of the substations, the voltage transformers

are located on the busbar side or on the line side. This results in a different
behaviour of the undervoltage protection.
1.2.3.1 VT at busbar side
A
B
C
Protection
IED
A
B
C
N
Figure 52 VT located at busbar side
When a tripping command is issued and the circuit breaker is open, the
voltage remains on the source side while the line side voltage drops to zero.
In this case, undervoltage protection may remain pickup. Therefore, to
167
resolve the problem, additional current criterion is considered. With the

current criterion, undervoltage protection can be maintained only when the
undervoltage criterion satisfied and a minimum current are exceeded the
setting ―I_UV_Chk‖. The undervoltage protection would dropout as soon as
the current falls below the corresponding setting. If the voltage transformer is
installed on the busbar side and it is not desired to check the current flow, this
criterion can be disabled by binary setting ―UV Chk Current‖.
1.2.3.2 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact checking
The IED can operate based on circuit breaker auxiliary contact supervision
criterion, for more security. With this feature, the IED would issue a trip
command when the circuit breaker is closed. This criterion can be enabled or
disabled via binary setting ―UV Chk CB‖. If it is not desired to supervise the
circuit breaker position for undervoltage protection, the criterion can be
disabled by the binary setting.
1.2.4 Logic diagram
168
Ua<U_UV
UV Chk All Phase off

Ub<U_UV O
R
Uc<U_UV
O UV PE on
R
Ua<U_UV
A
Ub<U_UV N
UV Chk All Phase on
D
Uc<U_UV
O
R
Uab<U_UV
UV Chk All Phase on

Ubc<U_UV O
R
Uca<U_UV
O UV PE off
R
Uab<U_UV
A
Ubc<U_UV N
UV Chk All Phase off
D
Uca<U_UV
UV Chk CB off
BI_PhA CB Open O
O R UV Trip on
BI_PhB CB Open
R UV Chk CB on
Trip
BI_PhC CB Open
Func_UV
T_UV
UV Chk Current on
IA(IB,IC)>I_UV_ A
Chk O
N
R
UV Chk Current off
D Alarm
UV Trip off
VT Fail on
VT fail
BI_AR In Progress 1
Figure 53 Logic diagram for undervoltage protection
169
IP1 Trip PhA

IP2 Trip PhB
IP3 Trip PhC
UP1 Trip 3Ph
UP2 Relay Block AR
UP3 UV1 Alarm
PhA CB Open UV2 Alarm
PhB CB Open UV1_Trip

PhC CB Open UV2_Trip
AR In Progress
Relay Startup
Relay Trip
Signal Description

Signal Description

AR In Progress AR In Progress
Signal Description

170
Signal Description

st
UV1 Alarm 1 stage UV alarm
nd
UV2 Alarm 2 stage UV alarm
st
UV1_Trip 1 stage UV trip
nd
UV2_Trip 2 stage UV trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 79 Undervoltage protection function setting list
Min. Default
Uni Max.
Setting (Ir:5A/1A setting Description
t (Ir:5A/1A)
) (Ir:5A/1A)
voltage threshold of undervoltage
U_UV1 V 5 150 40
stage 1
T_UV1 s 0 60 0.3 delay time of undervoltage stage 1
voltage threshold of undervoltage
U_UV2 V 5 150 45
stage 2
T_UV2 s 0 60 0.6 delay time of undervoltage stage 2
Dropout_U
1.01 2 1.05 reset ratio of undervoltage
V
I_UV_Chk A 0.08Ir 2Ir 0.1Ir current threshold of undervoltage
Table 80 Undervoltage protection binary setting list
Name Description
Func_UV1 Undervoltage stage 1 enabled or disabled

UV1 Trip Undervotage stage 1 tripping enabled or disabled
Func_UV2 Undervoltage stage 2 enabled or disabled
UV2 Trip Undervotage stage 2 tripping enabled or disabled
UV PE Phase to phase measured for undervoltage protection
171
Name Description
UV Chk All Phase Three phase voltage checked for undervoltage protection
UV Chk Current Current checked for undervoltage protection
UV Chk CB CB Aux. contact checked for undervoltage protection
1.5 Reports
UV1 Trip Undervoltage stage 1 trip

UV2 Trip Undervoltage stage 2 trip
UV1 Alarm Undervoltage stage 1 alarm

UV2 Alarm Undervoltage stage 2 alarm
1.6 Technical data
Table 83 Technical data for undervoltage protection

Voltage connection Phase-to-phase voltages or ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
phase-to-earth voltages
Phase to earth voltage 5 to 75 V , step 1 V ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
Phase to phase voltage 10 to 150 V, step 1 V ≤ ±3 % setting or ±1 V
Reset ratio 1.01 to 2.00, step 0.01 ≤ ±3 % setting
Time delay 0.00 to 120.00 s, step 0.01 s ≤ ±1 % setting or +50 ms, at
Current criteria 0.08 to 2.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
172
Reset time ≤ 50 ms
173
174
Chapter 13 Circuit breaker failure
protection

protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used for circuit
breaker failure protection function.
175
protection
1 Circuit breaker failure protection
1.1 Introduction
The circuit breaker failure (CBF) protection function monitors proper tripping
of the relevant circuit breaker. Normally, the circuit breaker should be tripped
and therefore interrupt the fault current whenever a short circuit protection
function issues a trip command. Circuit breaker failure protection provides
rapid back-up fault clearance, in the event of circuit breaker malfunction in
respond to a trip command.
Line2 Line3 LineN
Bus
Trip
IFAULT
Figure 54 Simplified function diagram of circuit breaker failure protection with current flow
monitoring
The Main CBF protection is as following:
 Two trip stages (local CB retripping and busbar trip)

 Internal/external initiation
 Single/three phase CBF initiation
 CB Aux checking
 Current criteria checking (including phase, zero and negative sequence
current)
176
protection
1.2 Function Description
Circuit breaker failure protection can be enabled or disabled, via binary

setting ―Func_CBF‖. If the binary setting is set to ―1/on‖, CBF protection would
be switched on. In this case, by operation of a protection function and
subsequent CBF initiation, a preset timer counts up. The CBF function issues
a local trip command (e.g. via a second trip coil) if the circuit breaker has not
been opened after expiry of the time setting ―T_CBF1‖. If the circuit breaker
doesn’t respond to the repeated trip command until time setting ―T_CBF2‖,
the function issues a trip command to isolate the fault by tripping other
surrounding backup circuit breakers (e.g. the other CBs connected to the
same bus section with faulty CB).
Initiation of CBF protection can be carried out by both internal and external
protection functions. If CBF needs to be initiated by means of external
protection functions, specified binary inputs (BI) should be marshaled to the
equipment. 4 digital inputs are provided for externally initiation of the
integrated CBF function. The first one is 3-phase CBF initiation ―3Ph Init CBF‖.
For phase segregated initiation other three binary inputs has been considered
as ―PhA Init CBF‖, ―PhB Init CBF‖ and ―PhC Init CBF‖. These can be
applicable if the circuit breaker supports separated trip coil for each phase
and single phase auto-recloser function is active on the feeder. Additionally,
internal protection functions that can initiate the CBF protection integrated are
as following:
 Distance protection
 Teleprotection based on distance/DEF
 Directional earth fault protection
 Over current protection
 SOTF protection
 Emergency/Backup EF protection
 Emergency/Backup overcurrent protection
 Overvoltage protection (trip stages)
 External initiation using binary input
There are two criteria for breaker failure detection: the first one is to check
whether the actual current flow effectively disappeared after a tripping
command had been issued. The second one is to evaluate the circuit breaker
auxiliary contact status. Since circuit breaker is supposed to be open when
177
protection
current disappears from the circuit, the first criterion (current monitoring) is
the most reliable means for IED to be informed about proper operation of
circuit breaker if the CBF initiating function had been based on current
measurement. Therefore,, both current monitoring and CB aux.contact are
applied to detect circuit breaker failure condition. In this context, the
monitored current of each phase is compared with the pre-defined setting,
―I_CBF‖. Furthermore, it is also possible to select current checking in case of
zero-sequence and negative-sequence currents via binary setting ―CBF Chk
3I0/3I2‖. If setting ―1/On‖ is applied at the binary setting, zero-sequence and
negative-sequence currents are calculated and compared
with user-defined settings. Corresponding settings include ―3I0_CBF‖ for

zero-sequence current and ―3I2_CBF‖ for negative-sequence current. The
logic for current criterion evaluation for CBF protection shows in Figure 55.
1.2.1 Current criterion evaluation
Ia > I_CBF
CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 Off
3I0 > 3I0_CBF
O
A CBF Curr. Crit. A
3I2 > 3I2_CBF R
O N CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 on
Ib > I_CBF R D
Ic > I_CBF
Ib > I_CBF
CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 Off
3I0 > 3I0_CBF
A O CBF Curr. Crit. B
3I2 > 3I2_CBF N R
O CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 on
Ic > I_CBF R D
Ia > I_CBF
Ic > I_CBF
CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 Off
3I0 > 3I0_CBF
A O CBF Curr. Crit. C
3I2 > 3I2_CBF N R
O CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 on
Ib > I_CBF R D
Ia > I_CBF O
R CBF Curr. Crit. 3P
178
protection
Figure 55 Current criterion evaluation for CBF protection
1.2.2 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation
For protection functions where the tripping criterion is not dependent on current
measurement, current flow is not a suitable criterion for detection of circuit breaker
operation. In this case, the position of the circuit breaker auxiliary contact should be used
to determine if the circuit breaker properly operated. It is possible to evaluate the circuit
breaker operation from its auxiliary contact status. To do so, binary setting ―CBF Chk CB
Status‖ should be set to ―1/On‖ to integrate circuit breaker auxiliary contacts into CBF
function. A precondition for evaluating circuit breaker auxiliary contact is that open status of
CB should be marshaled to digital inputs of ――PhA CB Open‖, ―PhB CB Open‖ and ―PhC CB
Open‖. The logic for evaluation of CB auxiliary contact for CBF protection is shown in
Figure 56. In this logic, the positions of the circuit breaker poles are determined from CB
aux. contacts if IED doesn’t detect current flowing in the diagram.
179
protection
BI_PhA CB Open A
N CB A is closed
BI_PhA Init CBF A D

N
CBF Curr. Crit. A O D
R
BI_PhB CB Open A
N CB B is closed
BI_PhB Init CBF A D
N
CBF Curr. Crit. B O D
R
BI_PhC CB Open A
N CB C is closed
BI_PhC Init CBF D
A
N
CBF Curr. Crit. C
O D
R
BI_PhA CB Open
A
BI_PhB CB Open N
D
BI_PhC CB Open
A
N CB ≥1P is closed
D
3Ph Init CBF A

N
CBF Curr. Crit. 3P O D
R
Figure 56 Circuit breaker auxiliary contact evaluation
1.2.3 Logic diagram
180
protection
BI_PhA Init CBF
BI_PhB Init CBF O T_alam Init CBF Err

BI_PhC Init CBF R
BI_3Ph Init CBF

A
N O
BI_PhA Init CBF PhA Init CBF
D R
Inter PhA Init CBF
A
N O PhB Init CBF
BI_PhB Init CBF
D R
Inter PhB Init CBF
A
N O
BI_PhC Init CBF PhC Init CBF
D R
Inter PhC Init CBF
A
N
D
A
N
D
A O
N R 3Ph Init CBF
A D
N
BI_3Ph Init CBF
D
Inter 3Ph Init CBF
Figure 57 Internal and external initiation
Note: In this figure, ―T_alarm‖ is a time period already designed in the program. T_alarm
equals to max {15s, T_CBF1+1s, T_CBFs+1s, T_Dead Zone +1s}, when the
corresponding functions are enabled. After this period, the alarm event ―BI_Init CBF Err
‖ will be issued.
181
protection
CB A is closed
CBF Chk CB Status O
CBF Curr. Crit. A R
A
N CBF A Startup
PhA Init CBF D
CB B is closed O
CBF Chk CB Status
CBF Curr. Crit. B
R
A
N CBF B Startup
PhB Init CBF D
CB C is closed
CBF Chk CB Status
O
CBF Curr. Crit. C R
A
CBF C Startup
N
PhC Init CBF
D
CB ≥1P is closed O
CBF Chk CB Status
CBF Curr. Crit. 3P R
A
N CBF 3P Startup
3Ph Init CBF D
Figure 58 CBF protection startup logic
182
protection
CBF A Startup T_CBF1
O
CBF1 Trip PhA
R
CBF B Startup T_CBF1 O

CBF1 Trip PhB
R
CBF C Startup T_CBF1
O
A CBF1 Trip PhC
R
N
D
A
N O
CBF1 Trip 3Ph
D R
A
N
D
CBF 3P Startup T_CBF1
Figure 59 First stage CBF tripping logic
CBF A Startup
O T_CBF 1P Trip 3P
R CBF 1P Trip 3P On
CBF B Startup O
O T_CBF 1P Trip 3P
CBF1 1P Trip 3P
R CBF 1P Trip 3P On
R
CBF C Startup
O T_CBF 1P Trip 3P
CBF1 Trip 3Ph R CBF 1P Trip 3P On
Figure 60 Three-phase local CB re-tripping from single phase CBF initiation
CBF A Startup T_CBF2
CBF B Startup T_CBF2

O
CBF2 Trip
R
CBF C Startup T_CBF2
CBF 3P Startup T_CBF2
183
protection
Figure 61 Second stage CBF tripping logic
IP1 Trip PhA

IP2 Trip PhB
IP3 Trip PhC
IN Trip 3Ph
PhA Init CBF Relay Block AR
PhB Init CBF CBF1_Trip
PhC Init CBF CBF 1P Trip 3P
3Ph Init CBF CBF2 Trip
PhA CB Open Relay Startup

PhB CB Open Relay Trip
PhC CB Open
Signal Description
IP1 signal for current input 1

Signal Description
PhA Init CBF PhaseA initiate CBF

PhB Init CBF PhaseB initiate CBF
PhC Init CBF PhaseC initiate CBF
3Ph Init CBF Three phase initiate CBF
184
protection
Signal Description

st
CBF1 Trip 1 stage CBF operation
CBF 1P Trip 3P Three phase re-tripping for single phase CBF
nd
CBF2 Trip 2 stage CBF operation
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 87 CBF protection function setting list
Default
U Min.
Max. setting
Setting ni (Ir:5A Description
(Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A
t /1A)
)
phase current threshold of circuit breaker
I_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir
failure protection
zero sequence current threshold of
3I0_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir
circuit breaker failure protection
negative sequence current threshold of
3I2_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir
circuit breaker failure protection
T_CBF1 s 0 32 0 delay time of CBF stage 1
T_CBF2 s 0.1 32 0.2 delay time of CBF stage 2
T_CBF 1P delay time of three phase tripping of CBF
s 0.05 32 0.1
Trip 3P stage 1
Table 88 CBF protection binary setting list
185
protection
CBF protection
Func_CBF 1 0 1
operating mode
Three pole tripping in
CBF 1P Trip 3P the case of single 0 0 1
pole failure
zero and negative
sequence current
CBF Chk 3I0/3I2 1 0 1
checking by CBF
protection
CB Auxiliary contact
CBF Chk CB Status checking for CBF 0 0 1
protection
1.5 Reports
CBF StartUp CBF Startup

st
CBF1 Trip 1 stage CBF operation tripping
nd
CBF2 Trip 2 stage CBF operation tripping
CBF 1P Trip 3P Three phase tripping for single pole CBF
BI_Init CBF Err CBF initiation BI error
Func_CBF On CBF function on

Func_CBF Off CBF function off
186
protection
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 92 Breaker failure protection technical data

phase current 0.08 Ir to 20.00 Ir ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
Negative sequence current
Time delay of stage 1 0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1% setting or +25 ms, at
Time delay of stage 2 0.00s to 32.00 s, step 0.01s 200% operating setting
Reset time of stage 1 < 20ms
187
protection
188
Chapter 14 Dead zone protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used for dead
zone (short zone) protection function.
189
1 Dead zone protection
1.1 Introduction
The IED provides this protection function to protect dead zone, the short area
between circuit breaker and CT in the case that CB is open. Therefore, by
occurrence of a fault in dead zone, the short circuit current is measured by
protection IED while CB auxiliary contacts indicate the CB is open.
In the case of feeders with bus side CTs, once a fault occurs in the dead zone,
the IED trips the relevant busbar zone CBs. Tripping concept is illustrated in
the below figure.
Trip
Bus
IFAULT
Line1 Line2 LineN
Legend:
Opened CB
Closed CB
Figure 62 Tripping logic for applying bus side CT
For feeders with line side CTs, when a fault occurs in the dead zone,
protection IED sends a transfer trip to remote end IED to isolate the fault.
190
Inter trip
Bus
IFAULT
Line1 Line2 LineN
Trip
Relay
Legend:
Opened CB
Closed CB
Figure 63 Dead zone tripping concept for feeders with line side CTs
 Internal/external initiation
 Self-adaptive for bus side CT or line side CT. For bus side CTs, the dead
zone protection will select to trip breakers on other lines connected to the
same busbar. For line side CTs, the dead zone protection will select trip
opposite side breakers on the same line.
1.2.2 Logic diagram
191
PhA Init CBF
PhB Init CBF

O
PhC Init CBF R
3Ph Init CBF
CBF Curr. Crit. A

O A
CBF Curr. Crit. B N T_Dead Zone Dead Zone Trip
R
D Func_Dead Zone On
CBF Curr. Crit. C
BI_PhA CB Open
A
BI_PhB CB Open N
D
BI_PhC CB Open
Figure 64 Dead zone protection logic
IP1 Relay Block AR

IP2 DeadZone_Trip
IP3 Relay Startup
PhA Init CBF Relay Trip
PhB Init CBF

PhC Init CBF
3Ph Init CBF
PhA CB Open
PhB CB Open
PhC CB Open
Signal Description

192
Signal Description
PhA Init CBF PhaseA initiate CBF

PhB Init CBF PhaseB initiate CBF
PhC Init CBF PhaseC initiate CBF
3Ph Init CBF Three phase initiate CBF
Signal Description

DeadZone_Trip DeadZone Trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 96 Dead zone protection function setting list
Time delay setting for

T_Dead Zone 1 s 0 32
dead zone protection
Table 97 Dead zone protection binary setting list
Dead Zone protection

Func_Dead Zone 1 0 1
operating mode
193
1.5 Reports
Dead Zone Trip Dead zone trip
Func_DZ On DZ function on
Func_DZ Off DZ function off
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:

Time delay 0.00s to 32.00s, step 0.01s ≤ ±1% setting or +40 ms, at
194
Chapter 15 STUB protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used for STUB
195
1 STUB protection
1.1 Introduction
Capacitor Voltage Transforemers (CVTs) are commonly installed at the line

side of transmission lines. Therefore, for the cases that transmission line is
taken out of service and the line disconnector is open, the distance protection
will not be able to operate and must be blocked.
The STUB protection protects the zone between the CTs and the open
disconnector. The STUB protection is enabled when the open position of the
disconnector is informed to the IED through connected binary input. The
function supports one definite stage with the logic shown inbelow figure.
Busbar A
CB1
CT1
Stub fault Feeder1
Disconnector1
CB3
CT3
Feeder2
Disconnector2
CT2
CB2
Busbar B
196
Figure 65 STUB fault at circuit breaker arrangement
If IED detects short circuit current flowing while the line disconnector is open,
STUB fault is detected for the short circuit in the area between the current
transformers and the line disconnector. Here, the summation of CT1 and CT3
presents the short circuit current.
The STUB protection is an overcurrent protection which is only in service if

the status of the line disconnector indicates the open condition. The binary
input must therefore be informed via an auxiliary contact of the disconnector.
In the case of a closed line disconnector, the STUB protection is out of
service. The STUB protection stage provides one definite time overcurrent
stage with settable delay time. This protection function can be enabled or
disabled via the binary setting ―Func_STUB‖. Corresponding current setting
value can be inserted in ―I_STUB‖ setting. The IED generate trip command
whenever the time setting ―T_STUB‖ is elapsed.
1.2.2 Logic diagram
Ia>I_STUB
Ib>I_STUB O
R
Ic>I_STUB
Func_STUB A
T_STUB Permanent
N trip
D
BI_STUB Enable
Figure 66 Logic diagram for STUB protection
IP1 Relay Block AR

IP2 STUB Trip
IP3 Relay Startup
STUB Enable Relay Trip
197
Signal Description

Signal Description
STUB Enable STUB protection enabled
Signal Description

STUB Trip STUB Trip
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 103 Setting value list for STUB protection
Min. Default
Max.
(Ir:5A/1A)
A) (Ir:5A/1A)
current threshold of STUB
I_STUB A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir
protection
T_STUB s 0 60 1 delay time of STUB protection
198
Table 104 Binary setting list for STUB protection
Name Description
STUB Enable Enable or disable STUB protection

Func_STUB Stub protection operating mode
1.5 Reports
STUB Trip STUB protection trip
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 106 Technical data for STUB protection

199
200
Chapter 16 Poles discordance
protection

protection
About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data for poles
discordance protection.
201
protection
1 Poles discordance protection
1.1 Introdcution
Under normal operating condition, all three poles of the circuit breaker must
be closed or open at the same time. The phase separated operating circuit
breakers can be in different positions (close-open) due to electrical or
mechanical failures. This can cause negative and zero sequence currents
which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can cause unwanted
operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.
Single pole opening of the circuit breaker is permitted only in the short period
related to single pole dead times, otherwise the breaker is tripped three pole
to resolve the problem. If the problem still remains, the remote end can be
intertripped via circuit breaker failure protection function to clear the
unsymmetrical load situation.
The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary

contacts of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from
unsymmetrical phase current.
The CB position signals are connected to IED via binary input in order to
monitor the CB status. Poles discordance condition is established when
binary setting ―Func_PD‖ is set to ―1/on‖ and at least one pole is open and at
the same time not all three poles are closed. The auxiliary contacts of the
circuit breakers are checked with corresponding phase currents for
plausibility check. Error alarm ―CB Err Blk PD‖ is reported after 5 sec
whenever CB auxiliary contacts indicate that one pole is open but at the same
time current is flowing through the pole.
Additionally the function can be informed via binary setting ―PD Chk 3I0/3I2‖ for
additionaly zero and negative sequence current as well as current criteria
involved in CBF protection. Pole discordance can be detected when current is
202
protection
not flowing through all three poles. When current is flowing through all three
poles, all three poles must be closed even if the breaker auxiliary contacts
indicate a different status.
1.2.2 Logic diagram
BI_PhA CB Open A
N
Ia > 0.06Ir
D
BI_PhB CB Open A O
N R
Ib > 0.06Ir
D
BI_PhC CB Open A A
N N 5s CB Err Blk PD
Ic > 0.06Ir
D D
BI_PhA CB Open
A
BI_PhB CB Open N
D
BI_PhC CB Open
BI_PhA CB Open A
N
Ia < 0.06Ir
D
BI_PhB CB Open A
O A
N T_PD PD Trip
Ib < 0.06Ir R N Func_PD On
D
D
BI_PhC CB Open A
N
Ic< 0.06Ir
D
3I2 > 3I2_PD O

3I0 > 3I0_PD
R
PD Chk 3I0/3I2 on
PD Chk 3I0/3I2 off

BI_AR In Progress 1
Figure 67 Logic diagram for poles discordance protection
203
protection
IP1 Trip 3Ph
IP2 Relay Block AR
IP3 PD_Trip
IN Relay Startup
PhA CB Open Relay Trip
PhB CB Open
PhC CB Open
AR In Progress
Signal Description

Signal Description
PhA CB Open Phase A CB open

PhB CB Open Phase B CB open
PhC CB Open Phase C CB open
AR In Progress AR in progress, to block poles discordance
operation
Signal Description

PD_Trip PD Trip
CB Err Blk PD Pole discordance blocked by CB error
PD Trip Fail Pole discordance trip fail
204
protection
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 110 Function setting list for poles discordance protection
Min.
Max. Default setting
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/1 Description
(Ir:5A/1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
A)
3I0_PD A 0 20Ir 0.4Ir threshold of pole discordance
protection
negative sequence current
protection
delay time of pole discordance
T_PD s 0 60 2
protection
Table 111 Binary setting list for poles discordance protection
Name Description
Func_PD Enable or disable poles discordance protection

PD Chk 3I0/3I2 Enable or disable 3I0/3I2 criteria
1.5 Reports
PD Startup Poles discordance protection startup

PD Trip Poles discordance protection trip
205
protection
CB Err Blk PD Circuit breaker error block poles discordance protection

PD Trip Fail Poles discordance protection trip fail
1.6 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 114 Technical data for poles discordance protection

206
Chapter 17 Synchro-check and
energizing check function

About this chapter

signals, parameter, IED report and technical data used in
synchro-check and energizing check function.
207
1 Synchro-check and energizing check

function
1.1 Introduction
The synchronism and voltage check function ensures that the stability of the
network is not endangered when switching a line onto a busbar. The voltage
of the feeder to be energized is compared to that of the busbar to check
conformances in terms of magnitude, phase angle and frequency within
certain tolerances.
The synchro-check function checks whether the voltages on both sides of the
circuit breaker are synchronize, or at least one side is dead to ensure closing
can be done safely.
When comparing the two voltages, the synchro check uses the voltages from
busbar and outgoing feeder. If the voltage transformers for the protective
functions are connected to the line side, the reference voltage has to be
connected to a busbar voltage.
If the voltage transformers for the protective functions are connected to the
busbar side, the reference voltage has to be connected to a line voltage.
Note:
 The reference voltage (single phase voltage) must be phase to earth

voltage.
 The voltage phase for synchro-ckeck and energizing check can be

identified automatically by protection IED and there is no need to be set
by user.
Synchro-check function can operate in several modes of operation, including

full synchro-check mode, energizing mode (dead line or bus check) and
override (synchro-check bypass) mode.
1.2.1 Synchro-check mode

208
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference
values are measured in the IED and are available for the synchro-check
function for evaluation.
By synchronization request, the synchronization conditions will be checked

continuously. If the line voltages and busbar voltages are larger than the
value of ―Umin_Syn‖ and meet the synchronization conditions, synchronized
reclosure can be performed.
At the end of the dead time, synchronization request will be initiated and the
synchronization conditions are continuously checked to be met for a certain
time during maximal extended time ―T_MaxSynExt‖. By satisfying
synch-check condition in this period, the monitor timer will stop and close
command will be issued for AR.
Before releasing a close command at synchronization conditions, all of the

following conditions should be satisfied:
 All three phases voltage U(a,b,c) should be above the setting value
―Umin_Syn‖.
 The reference voltage should be above the setting value ―Umin_Syn‖.
 The voltage difference should be within the permissible deviation ―U_Syn

Diff‖
 The angle difference should be within the permissible deviation

―Angle_Syn Diff‖
 The frequency difference should be within the permissible deviation

―Freq_Syn Diff‖
1.2.2 Energizing ckeck mode
In this mode of operation, the low voltage (dead) condition is checked

continuously whenever synchronization check is requested. If the line
voltages are less than ―Umax_Energ‖, reclosure can be performed. If the line
voltages and busbar voltages are all larger than ―Umin_Syn‖, the check mode
will automatically turn to full synchronization check mode.
In auto-recloser procedure, synchronization check request is triggered at the

end of the dead time. If the low voltage conditions are continuously met for a
certain numbers and during maximum extended time ―T_MaxSynExt‖, the
209
monitor timer will stop and close command will be issued for AR.
Before releasing a close command in low voltage conditions, one of the

following conditions need to be checked according to requirement:
 Energizing check for dead line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word ―AR_EnergChkDLLB‖ is on
 Energizing check for live line and live bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word ―AR_EnergChkLLDB‖ is on
 Energizing check for dead line and dead bus for AR enabled or disabled,
when the control word ―AR_EnergChkDLDB‖ is on
1.2.3 Override mode
In this mode, autoreclosure will be released without any check.
1.2.4 Logic diagram
210
AR_Syn Check off
O
Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn AR_Syn Check on R
A
Ux>Umin_Syn
N A Synchr-check or
Anglediff<Angle_Syn Diff D O N T_Syn Check energizing check
R D meet
Freqdiff<Freq_Syn Diff
Udiff<U_Syn Diff
Synchr-check or
AR_EnergChkDLLB off T_MaxSynExt energizing check
fail
Ux <Umax_Energ
AR_EnergChkDLLB O
A on
R
Ua(Ub,Uc) N
>Umin_Syn
VT_Line off D
AR_EnergChkLLDB
off
AR_EnergChkDLLB
on
O
Ux>Umin_Syn A R O
Ua(Ub,Uc) N R
<Umax_Energ
D
VT_Line off AR_EnergChkDLDB
off
AR_EnergChkDLDB
on
O
A R
Ux<Umax_Energ
N
Ua(Ub,Uc)
<Umax_Energ
D
AR_EnergChkDLLB
off
AR_EnergChkDLLB O
on
R
Ux >Umin_Syn
A
Ua(Ub,Uc) N
<Umax_Energ
VT_Line on D
AR_EnergChkLLDB
off
AR_EnergChkLLDB O
on
Ux<Umax_Energ A R
Ua(Ub,Uc) N
>Umin_Syn D
VT_Line on
Figure 68 Logic diagram for synchro-check functio
211
UP1
UP2
UP3
UPX
Signal Description

UPX Reference voltage input
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 116 Synchro-check function setting list
Min. Max. Default

Setting Unit (Ir:5A (Ir:5A/1 setting Description
/1A) A) (Ir:5A/1A)
Angle_Syn angle difference threshold of
Degree 1 80 30
Diff synchronizing
voltage difference threshold of
U_Syn Diff V 1 40 10
synchronizing
Freq_Syn frequency difference threshold of
Hz 0.02 2 0.05
Diff synchronizing
T_Syn
s 0 60 0.05 delay time of synchronizing
Check
T_MaxSynE
s 0.05 60 10 duration of quit synchronizing
xt
Umin_Syn V 30 65 40 Minimum voltage of synchronizing
Maximum voltage of unenergizing
Umax_Energ V 10 50 30
checking
212
Table 117 Synchro-check binary setting list
Name Description
AR_Override Override mode for AR enabled or disabled

AR_EnergChkDLLB Dead line live bus of energizing check for AR enabled or disabled
AR_EnergChkLLDB Live line dead bus of energizing check for AR enabled or disabled
AR_EnergChkDLDB Dead line dead bus of energizing check for AR enabled or disabled
AR_Syn check Synchronization check for AR enabled or disabled
1) ―Angle_Syn Diff‖：Maximum allowable phase difference between bus

voltage and line angle under synchronization check mode.
2) ―U_Syn Diff‖：Maximum allowable phase difference between bus voltage

and line voltage under synchronization check mode.
3) ―Freq_Syn Diff‖：Maximum allowable frequency difference between bus

voltage and line frequency under synchronization check mode.
4) ―T_Syn Check‖： delay time of synchronizing.
5) ―T_MaxSynExt‖： Duration of quit synchronizing.
6) ―Umin_Syn‖： Minimum voltage of synchronizing.
7) ―Umax_Energ‖： Maximum voltage of unenergizing checking.
8) Bits of ―AR_Override‖, ―AR_EnergChkDLLB‖, ―AR_EnergChkLLDB‖,

―AR_EnergChkDLDB‖ and ―AR_Syn check‖: All of these three modes are
autoreclosure check modes. If anyone of them is set to ―on‖, the others must
be set to ―off‖.
1.5 Reports
213
Syn Request Begin to synchronization check

AR_EnergChk OK Energizing check OK
Syn Failure Synchronization check timeout
Syn OK Synchronization check OK
Syn Vdiff fail Voltage difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Fdiff fail Frequency difference for synchronization check fail
Syn Angdiff fail Angle difference for synchronization check fail
EnergChk fail Energizing check fail
SYN Voltage Err Voltage abnormity for synchronization check
1.6 Technical data
Table 120 Synchro-check and voltage check technical data

Operating mode Synchronization check:
 Synch-check
 Energizing check, and
synch-check if
energizing check failure
 Override
Energizing check:
 Dead V4 and dead V3Ph
 Dead V4 and live V3Ph
 Live V4 and dead V3Ph
Voltage threshold of dead line 10 to 50 V (phase to earth), ≤ ± 3 % setting or 1 V

or bus step 1 V
Voltage threshold of live line 30 to 65 V (phase to earth), ≤ ± 3 % setting or 1 V
or bus step 1 V
214
∆V-measurement Voltage 1 to 40 V (phase-to-earth), ≤ ± 1V
difference steps 1 V
Δf-measurement (f2>f1; 0.02 to 2.00 Hz, step, 0.01 ≤ ± 20 mHz
f2<f1) Hz,
Δα-measurement (α2>α1; 1 °to 80 °, step, 1 ° ≤ ± 3°
α2<α1)
Minimum measuring time 0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s, ≤ ± 1.5 % setting value or +60
ms
Maximum synch-check 0.05 to 60.00 s, step,0.01 s, ≤ ± 1 % setting value or +50
extension time ms
215
216
Chapter 18 Auto-reclosing function
About this chapter

Auto-reclosing function.
217
1 Auto-reclosing
1.1 Introduction
For restoration of the normal service after a fault, an auto-reclosing attempt is

mostly made for overhead lines. Experiences show that about 85% of faults
are transient and can disappear when an auto-reclosing attempt is performed.
This means that the line can be connected again; the reconnection is
accomplished after a dead time via the automatic reclosing system. If the fault
still exists after auto-reclosing, for example, arc has not been cleared, the
protection will re-trip the circuit breaker (hereinafter is referred as CB).
Auto-reclosing is only permitted on overhead lines because a short circuit arc

can be extinguished only in overhead lines and not cable feeders. Main
features of the auto-reclosing function (hereinafter is referred as AR) are as
following:
 4 shots auto-reclosing (selectable)
 Individually settable dead time for three phase and single phase fault and
for each shot
 Internal/external AR initiation
 Single/three phase AR operation
 CB ready supervision
 CB Aux. interrogation
 Cooperation with internal synch-check function for reclosing command
The AR is able to cooperate with single-pole operated CB as well as

three-pole operated CB. The function provides up to 4 auto-reclosing shots
that can be determined by setting, ―Times_AR‖. Moreover, since the time
required for extinguishing short circuit arc is different for single or three phase
faults, the different dead time settings, ―T_1P ARn‖ and ―T_3P ARn‖ ( n
represents 1, 2, 3, or 4), AR have been provided to set single-pole tripping
dead time and three-pole tripping dead time of each shot separately.
1.2.1 Single-shot reclosing
218
When an external trip command initiates AR function, the reclosing program

is being executed. Dead time will be started by falling edge of the external
initiation signal. When dead time interval ―T_1P AR1‖ or ―T_3P AR1‖ has
elapsed, monitoring time ―T_MaxSynExt‖ is started. During this period,
whenever synchronization condition is continuously met for ―T_Syn Check‖, a
closing pulse signal is issued. At the same time, reclaim time ―T_Reclaim‖ is
started. If a new fault occurs before the reclaim time elapses, AR function is
blocked and cause final tripping of CB. However, if no fault occurs in reclaim
time, AR is reset and therefore will be ready for future reclosing attempts.
The typical tripping-reclosing procedure of single shot reclosing scheme, is

illustrated in time sequence diagrams, Figure 69, and is described as
following:
1) After trip command issued, CB will be opened in a short time.
2) The auto-reclosing is initiated when the current is cleared.
3) After the auto-reclosing delay time, T_1P AR1 (or T_3P AR1), elapses,
the reclosing command is issued if all reclosing conditions (e.g. synchro-
-check for 3-pole tripping) are satisfied without any blocking reclosing
input.
4) The AR pulse lasts for ―T_Action‖.
5) At the moment that the closing signal is issued, reclaim timer

―T_Reclaim‖ is started. By the end of this period, ―T_Reclaim‖, if there is
not fault happening, auto-reclosing operation is successful and then the
report, ―AR Success‖, is issued.
6) From the end of reclaim time, auto-reclosing function is blocked for the
AR reset time ―T_AR Reset‖.
7) If another fault occurs after the time, T_AR Reset, elapses, the auto-
-reclosing is ready now, and then a new tripping-reclosing procedure is
started and performed in same way.
219
Fault
Trip Command
CB Open PosItion
AR Initiate
T_3P AR1
Synchro-check or
voltage check OK
T_Action T_Action
Closing Command
T_Reclaim
T_Reset
Figure 69 Two transient three-phase faults, two tripping-reclosing procedures
1.2.2 Multi-shot reclosing
The first reclosing shot is, in principle, the same as the single-shot
auto-reclosing. If the first reclosing is unsuccessful, it doesn’t result in a final
trip, if multi-shot reclosing is set to be performed. In this case, if a fault occurs
during reclaim time of the first reclosing shot, it would result in the start of the
next reclose shot with dead time ―T_1pAR1‖, ―T_1p AR2‖, ‖T_1p AR3‖, ―T_1p
AR4‖, ―T_3P AR2‖, ―T_3P AR3‖ or ―T_3P AR4‖. This procedure can be
repeated until the whole reclosing shots which are set inside the device is
performed. Different dead times can be set to various shots of AR function.
This can be performed through settings ―T_1pAR1‖, ―T_1p AR2‖, ‖T_1p AR3‖,
―T_1p AR4‖, T_3p AR1‖, ―T_3p AR2‖, ‖T_3p AR3‖, ―T_3p AR4‖. However, if
none of reclosing shots is successful, i.e. the fault doesn’t disappear after the
last programmed shot, a final trip is issued, and reclosing attempts are
announced to be unsuccessful.
The typical tripping-reclosing procedure of two shots reclosing scheme, is

illustrated in time sequence diagrams, Figure 70, and is described as
following:
1) After trip command issued, CB will be opened in a short time.
2) The auto-reclosing is initiated when the current is cleared.
220
3) After the auto-reclosing delay time, T_1P AR1 (or T_3P AR1), elapses,
the reclosing command is issued if all reclosing conditions (e.g. synchro-
-check for 3-pole tripping) are satisfied without any blocking reclosing
input.
4) The AR pulse lasts for ―T_Action‖.
5) At the moment that the closing signal is issued, reclaim timer

―T_Reclaim‖ is started.
6) If the circuit breaker is closed on a fault during the period between the
dropout of closing command and the end of T_Reclaim, second tripping-
-reclosing procedure for second shot is started and performed like the
first tripping-reclosing procedure.
7) In this way, following shots will be performed in sequence if applied.
8) If none of the reclosing is successful, in other words, the fault is still

remained after the last shot reclosing, the final trip takes place, and the
result is ―AR Fail‖ and AR should be blocked for AR reset time.
9) If one of the preset reclosing shots is successful, meaning that, by the

end of this period, ―T_Reclaim‖, there is not fault happening again, the
report, ―AR Success‖, is issued.
10) From the end of reclaim time, auto-reclosing function is blocked for the
AR reset time ―T_AR Reset‖.
11) If another fault occurs after the time, T_AR Reset, elapses, the auto-
-reclosing is ready now, and then a new multi shots tripping-reclosing
procedure is started and performed in same way.
221
Fault
Trip Command
CB Open PosItion
AR Initiate
T_3P AR1
Synchro-check or
voltage check OK
T_Action T_Action
Closing Command
T_Reclaim
T_Reset
Figure 70 A permanent three-phase fault, two reclosing shots and final tripping
1.2.3 Auto-reclosing operation mode
For the IED, whether single-pole tripping operation or three-pole tripping

operation and whether AR is active or not is determined by following binary
settings and related binary inputs.
The relevant binary settings are described as following:
 “AR_1p mode”
In this mode of operation, auto-reclosing function will be initiated by

single phase tripping condition as well as using the external single pole
binary input initiation. If the three-phase AR initiation binary input, 3Ph
Init AR, is active, the closing function will be blocked.
 “AR_3p mode”
In this mode of operation, auto-reclosing function only operates for

three pole closing.
 “AR_1p(3p) mode”
In this mode of operation, auto-reclosing function operates for both

single pole tripping as well as three pole tripping.
222
 “AR_Disable”
By setting this binary setting to ―1‖, auto-reclosing function will be off or

out of service.
Note: If any illegal setting has been done, ―AR FUNC Alarm‖ is
reported.
 “AR Init by 3p”
By setting this binary setting to ―1‖, auto-reclosing function can be

initiated by three phase faults as well as single phase faults. Otherwise,
auto-reclosing can be done only for single phase faults according to the
mode of auto-reclosing operation define previously.
 “AR Init by 2p”
By setting this binary setting to ―1‖, auto-reclosing function can be

initiated by two phase fault.
 “Relay Trip 3pole”
When AR is disabled, by setting this binary setting to ―0‖, IED performs

single- pole tripping at single phase fault and perform three-pole
tripping at multi-phase fault. Setting this binary setting to ―1‖ will result in
three-pole tripping at any faults.
 “AR Final Trip”
By setting this binary setting to ―1‖, auto-reclosing function generates a

three pole trip command for an unsuccessful single pole reclosing.
In the ―AR_1P mode‖, after a single pole tripping, if auto-reclosing

function is blocked suddenly during the dead time of a 1-pole reclosing
cycle, the circuit breaker will be kept in poles discordance state. To
avoiding this state, by binary setting ―AR Final Trip‖ at 1, the IED will
issue a 3-pole trip command to open the rest of circuit breaker poles.
This binary setting is always used in the situation without pole
discordance protection applied.
1.2.4 Auto-reclosing initiation
The auto-reclosing function can be initiated by the internal functions listed

below:
 Distance Z1
 Teleprotection based on distance tripping
223
 Directional earth fault protection-stage 1 (selectable by binary setting

―DEF1 Initiate AR‖)
 Directional earth fault protection-stage 2 (selectable by binary setting

―DEF2 Initiate AR‖)
 Teleprotection directional earth fault tripping (selectable by binary setting

―Pilot_DEF Init AR‖)
 Phase selective AR external initiation; AR will be initiated by falling edge

of the receiving trip signals (―1‖ to ―0‖)
AR can be initiated by external functions via four binary inputs:
 PhA Init AR
External phase A tripping output initiates AR
 PhB Init AR
External phase B tripping output initiates AR
 PhC Init AR
External phase C tripping output initiates AR
 3Ph Init AR
External three-phase tripping output initiates AR
1.2.5 Cooperating with external protection IED
The AR can cooperate with external protection IED. The AR can be initiated
or blocked by external protection IED via dedicated binary inputs.
Figure 71 shows the typical connection between AR binary inputs and

external protection IED binary outputs.
224
BO-Trip PhA BI-PhA Init AR

BO-Trip PhB BI-PhB Init AR
Protection Protection
IED BO-Trip PhC BI-PhC Init AR
IED with AR
BO-Trip 3Ph BI-3Ph Init AR
BO Relay Block AR BI-MC/AR Block
On Off BI-AR OFF
Figure 71 Typical connection between two protection IEDs with/without AR
1.2.6 Auto-reclosing logic
Some important points regarded to auto-reclosing logic are described as

following:
 In the case of blocking of auto-reclosing via ―MC/AR block‖, blocking will

be started by rising edge of ―MC/AR block‖ and will be extended by
―T_AR_Reset‖ time after falling edge of this binary input.
 In the case of three phase reclosing with sychro-check requesting, dead

time can last for ―T_3P AR‖ + ―T_MaxSynExt‖ at most, from the
auto-reclosing initiation input end. In this condition, IED starts to check
synchronization conditions at the end of ―T_3P AR‖. Before the end of
period, ―T_MaxSynExt‖, if the synchronization conditions are
continuously met for the time, ―T_Syn Check‖ at least, the close
command will be issued. After the end of period, ―T_MaxSynExt‖, if
synchronization conditions are still not continuously met, the report, ―AR
Failure‖, will be issued and the auto-reclosing function will be blocked for
time, ―T_AR Reset‖. The logic is illustrated in flowing time sequence
diagram
225
Fault
Trip Command
CB Open PosItion
AR Initiate
T_3P AR1
t1 t2 t3 t4 t5 t6
Synchro-check or
voltage check OK
T_Syn Check
T_MaxSynExt
T_Action
Closing Command
T_Reclaim
T_Reset
Note:
T_Syn Check > t1, t2, t4, t5, t6;
T_Syn Check ≤ t3
Figure 72 A permanent three-phase fault, successful synchronizing for first

shot, fail synchronizing for second shot
 Close command pulse lasts for ―T_Action‖ at most. During this time, it
does not check synchronization conditions any longer. Before the end of
close command pulse, if any function tripping happen, the close
command is terminated.
226
Fault
Trip Command
CB Open Position
AR for CB: AR Initiate
AR for CB: T_3P AR1
AR for CB: Synchro-check or

voltage check OK
T_Action
AR for CB: Closing command
AR for CB: T_Reclaim
AR for CB: T_Reset
Figure 73 A permanent three-phase fault, single shot unsuccessful reclosing
 To prevent automatic reclosing during feeder dead status (CB Open), for
example, in the IED testing, AR is initiated at first shot only when the CB
has been closed for more than setting time, ―T_AR Reset‖.
1.2.7 AR blocked conditions
 If binary input ―AR Off‖ is present, auto-reclosing function will be out of

service
 Whenever the binary input ―MC/AR Block‖ is received, auto-reclosing

function will be blocked for setting ―T_AR Reset‖.
 Whenever circuit breaker abnormal condition is detected, auto-reclosing

function will be blocked.
In order to avoid auto-reclosing in the case of CB faulty, for example, CB

spring charge faulty, a binary input, ―CB Faulty‖, is considered to receive CB
ready status. Therefore, after synchronization check condition meets, the
input ―CB Faulty‖will be checked. If it doesn’t disappear before time period
227
―T_CB Faulty‖ finishing, auto-reclosing will be blocked for ―T_AR Reset‖.
1.2.8 Logic diagram
BI_PhA Init AR 1-0

AND
A Phase no current
BI_PhB Init AR 1-0

AND OR Single phase Startup AR
AND
B Phase no current
BI_PhC Init AR 1-0

AND
C Phase no current
BI_PhA Init AR 1-0
BI_PhB Init AR 1-0 AND
3 Phase no current
BI_PhB Init AR 1-0
BI_PhC Init AR 1-0 AND
3 Phase no current
OR 3 phase Startup AR
BI_PhC Init AR 1-0
BI_PhA Init AR 1-0 AND
3 Phase no current
BI_3Ph Init AR 1-0

AND
3 Phase no current
Figure 74 Logic diagram 1 for auto-reclosing startup
Besides, auto-reclosing startup could also be triggered by circuit breaker

opening as following figure:
228
BI_PhA CB Open 0-1
AND
1P CBOpen Init AR on
BI_PhB CB Open 0-1
AND Single phase Startup AR

AND OR
BI_PhC CB Open 0-1
AND
BI_PhA CB Open 0-1
BI_PhB CB Open 0-1 AND
BI_PhB CB Open 0-1
BI_PhC CB Open 0-1 OR 3 phase Startup AR

AND
BI_PhC CB Open 0-1
BI_PhA CB Open 0-1

AND
Figure 75 Logic diagram 2 for auto-reclosing startup
AR_Chk3PVol =0
1)
AR_Chk3PVol =1 t 0
OR
AND
Ua(Ub,Uc) >Umin_Syn
AND Check 3Ph Voltage OK
2) 3)
t 0 t 0
Note:
1) t = T_Syn Check
2) t = T_3P AR Check 3 Ph failure
3) t = T_MaxSynExt
Figure 76 Logic diagram of checking 3 phase voltage
229
Check 3Ph Voltage OK
AR_1p mode =1
AND
AR_1p(3p) mode =1 OR 1)
t 0
AND
Single phase initiate AR
OR
AR_3p mode = 1
AR_1p(3p) mode =1 OR
AND
3 phase initiate AR 2)
t 0
AND
NO check
Energizing check OK OR
3)
t 0
Synchro-check OK
AND AR Closing
BI_MC/AR block: 0-1
Backup protection tripping
OR
Alarm: Relay fault
BI_AR off: 0-1
OR
AR_Disable =1
4)
BI_CB Faulty t 0
AR Fail
Relay Trip 3 pole =1 AND
AR_3p mode =1
Ph A Tripping: 0-1
OR AR Lockout
Ph B Tripping: 0-1 AND
Ph B Tripping: 0-1
OR
3 Ph Tripping: 0-1
AND
Relay trip 3 Ph = 1
AR_1p mode = 1
Note:
1) t = T_1P AR
2) t = T_3P AR
3) t = T_MaxSynExt
4) t = T_CB Faulty
Figure 77 Logic diagram of auto-reclosing
230
IP1 AR Close
IP2 AR Lockout
IP3 AR Not Ready
UP1 AR Final Trip
UP2 AR In Progress
UP3 AR Successful
UP4 AR Fail
PhA Init AR
PhB Init AR
PhC Init AR
3Ph Init AR
MC/AR Block
AR off
CB Faulty
PhA CB Open
PhB CB Open
PhC CB Open
V1P MCB Fail
Signal Description

UP1 signal for voltage input 1
Signal Description
AR Off AR function off
MC/AR Block AR block
PhA Init AR PhaseA initiate AR
PhB Init AR PhaseB initiate AR
PhC Init AR PhaseC initiate AR
3Ph Init AR Three phase initiate AR
CB Faulty CB faulty
231
PhA CB Open Phase A CB Open

PhB CB Open Phase B CB Open
PhC CB Open Phase C CB Open
V1P MCB Fail Single phase MCB VT fail
Signal Description
AR Close AR Close
AR Lockout AR Lockout
AR Not Ready AR Not Ready
AR Final Trip AR Final Trip
AR In Progress AR In Progress
AR Successful AR Successful
AR Fail AR Fail
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 124 Auto reclosure function setting list
Min. Max. Default

1A) 1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
delay time of shot 1 of single pole
T_1P AR1 s 0.05 10 0.6
reclosing
T_1P AR2 s 0.05 10 0.7
reclosing
T_1P AR3 s 0.05 10 0.8
reclosing
T_1P AR4 s 0.05 10 0.9
reclosing
delay time of shot 1 of three pole
T_3P AR1 s 0.05 60 1.1
reclosing
T_3P AR2 s 0.05 60 1.2
reclosing
T_3P AR3 s 0.05 60 1.3
reclosing
T_3P AR4 s 0.05 60 1.4
reclosing
T_Action ms 80 500 80 duration of the circuit breaker
232
Min. Max. Default

1A) 1A) (Ir:5A/1A)
closing
pulse
T_Reclaim s 0.05 60 3 Reclaim time
T_CB Faulty s 0.5 60 1 duration of CB ready
Times_AR 1 4 1 quanty of shots
T_Syn
s 0 60 0.05 delay time of synchronizing
Check
T_MaxSynE
s 0.05 60 10 duration of quit synchronizing
xt
T_AR Reset s 0.5 60 3 duration of CB reclosing prepartion
Table 125 Auto reclosure binary setting list
AR Init By 2p AR Initiated by phase-to-phase fault 0 0 1

AR Init By 3p AR Initiated by three phase fault 1 0 1
Relay Trip 3pole Three phase tripping 0 0 1
Auto reclosure initiated by tele earth
Tele_EF Init AR 0 0 1
fault protection
Auto-reclosing initiated by first stage
EF1 Init AR 0 0 1
zero-sequence current protection
Auto-reclosing initiated by second stage
EF2 Init AR 0 0 1
zero-sequence current protection
single phase mode for Auto-reclosing
AR_1p mode 1 0 1
function
three phase mode for Auto-reclosing
AR_3p mode On 0 0 1
function
one and three phase mode for
AR_1p(3p) mode 0 0 1
Auto-reclosing function
AR_Disable Auto-reclosing function disabled 0 0 1
Override mode for AR enabled or
AR_Override 1 0 1
disabled
Synchronization check for AR enabled
AR_Syn check 0 0 1
or disabled
three phase voltage check for single
AR_Chk3PVol 0 0 1
phase AR
AR Final Trip Final trip by AR 0 0 1
1P CBOpen Init AR AR initiated by single phase CB open 0 0 1
233
3P CBOpen Init AR AR initiated by three phase CB open 0 0 1
1.5 Reports
1st Reclose First reclose
2nd Reclose Second reclose
3rd Reclose Third reclose
4th Reclose Fourth reclose
1Ph Trip Init AR Autoreclose by one phase trip
1Ph CBO Init AR Autoreclose by one phase circuit breaker opening
1Ph CBO Blk AR Autoreclose blocked by one phase circuit breaker opening
3Ph Trip Init AR Autoreclose initiated by three phase trip
3Ph CBO Init AR Autoreclose initiated by three phase breaker opening
3Ph CBO Blk AR Autoreclose blocked by three phase trip
AR Block Autoreclose blocked
BI MC/AR BLOCK Autoreclose BI blocked
AR Success Autoreclose success
AR Final Trip Final trip for autoreclose
AR in progress Autoreclose is in progress
AR Failure Autoreclosure failed
AR Mode Alarm Autoreclosure mode alarm
1.6 Technical data

Number of reclosing shots Up to 4
Shot 1 to 4 is individually
selectable
234
AR initiating functions Internal protection functions

External binary input
Dead time, separated setting 0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s ≤ ± 1 % setting value or +50
for shots 1 to 4 ms
Reclaim time 0.50 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s
Blocking duration time (AR 0.05 s to 60.00s, step 0.01 s
reset time)
Circuit breaker ready 0.50 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s
supervision time
Dead time extension for 0.05 s to 60.00 s, step 0.01 s
synch-check (Max. SYNT
EXT)
235
236
Chapter 19 Secondary system
supervision

supervision
About this chapter

secondary system supervision function.
237
supervision
1 Current circuit supervision
1.1 Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted

operation of many protection functions such as earth fault protection and
negative sequence current functions.
It must be remembered that a blocking of protection functions at CT open

causes extremely high voltages that can stress the secondary circuit.
To prevent IED from wrong tripping, interruptions in the secondary circuits of

current transformers is detected and reported by the device. When the
measured zero-sequence current is always larger than the setting value of
―3I0_CT Fail‖ for 12 sec, ―CT Fail‖ is reported and zero-sequence current
protection will be blocked.
1.2 Function diagram
IN CT Fail
Signal Description
Signal Description
CT Fail CT Fail
238
supervision
1.4.1 Setting lists
Table 130 Fuse failure supervision function setting list
Max.
Default
Min. (Ir:5
Setting Unit setting Description
(Ir:5A/1A) A/1A
(Ir:5A/1A)
)
zero sequence current threshold
3I0_CT Fail A 0.08Ir 2Ir 0.2Ir
of CT failure detection
Table 131 Fuse failure supervision binary setting list
CT Fail Check CT mode 1 0 1
1.5 Reports
CT Fail CT fail
239
supervision
2 Fuse failure supervision
2.1 Introduction
In the event of a measured voltage failure due to a broken conductor or a

short circuit fault in the secondary circuit of voltage transformer, those
protection functions which are based on under-voltage criteria may
mistakenly see a voltage of zero. VT failure supervision function is provided to
inform those functions about a voltage failure. VT supervision can be used to
monitor the voltage transformer circuit, single-phase VT failures, two-phase or
three-phase VT failures. Its main features are as follows:
 Symmetrical/Asymmetrical VT fail detection
 3-phase AC voltage MCB monitoring
 Applicable in solid, compensated or isolated networks
VT failure supervision function can be enabled or disabled via binary setting

―VT Fail‖. By applying setting ―1/on‖ to this binary setting, VT failure
supervision function would monitor the voltage transformer circuit. As
mentioned, the function is able to detect single-phase broken, two-phase
broken or three-phase broken faults in secondary circuit of voltage
transformer, if a three-phase connection is applied.
There are three main criteria for VT failure detection; the first is dedicated to
detect three-phase broken faults. The second and third ones are to detect
single or two-phase broken faults in solid earthed and isolated/resistance
earthed systems, respectively. A precondition to meet these three criteria is
that IED should not startup and the calculated zero sequence and negative
sequence currents should be less than setting of ―3I02_ VT Fail‖. The criteria
are as follows:
2.2.1 Three phases (symmetrical) VT Fail
The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 as well as maximum of three

phase-to-earth voltages is less than the setting of ―Upe_VT Fail‖ and at the
240
supervision
same time, maximum of three phase currents is higher than setting of ―I_ VT
Fail‖. This condition may correspond to three phase broken fault in secondary
circuit of the voltage transformer if no startup element has been activated.
2.2.2 Single/two phases (asymmetrical) VT Fail
1. The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
―Upe_VT Fail‖. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken
fault in secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is
solidly earthed and no startup element has been activated.
2. The calculated zero sequence voltage 3U0 is more than the setting of
―Upe_VT Fail‖, and at the same time, the difference between the maximum
and minimum phase-to-phase voltages is more than the setting of ―Upp_VT
Fail‖. This condition may correspond to single or two-phase broken fault in
secondary circuit of the voltage transformer, if the system starpoint is isolated
or resistance earthed and no startup element has been activated.
In addition to the mentioned conditions, IED has the capability to be informed

about the VT MCB failure through its digital inputs ―V3P MCB Fail‖. In this
context, VT fail is detected, if the corresponding binary input is active.
2.2.3 Logic diagram
If VT failure supervision detects a failure in voltage transformer secondary

circuit, either by means of the above mentioned criteria or reception of a VT
MCB fail indication, all the protection functions, which are based on direction
component or low voltage criteria, will be blocked. Furthermore, Alarm report
―VT fail‖ is issued after 10s delay time. The blocking condition would be
removed if one of the following conditions is met within the 10 sec delay time
(previous to Alarm ―VT fail‖).
1. Without IED startup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
―Upe_VT Normal‖ for 500ms.
2. Without IED startup, minimum phase voltage becomes more than setting of
―Upe_VT Normal‖ and at the same time, the calculated zero sequence and
negative sequence current of corresponding side becomes more than the
setting of ―3I02_ VT Fail‖.
Subsequent to VT fail alarm, the blocking condition of respective protection

functions would be removed if without IED startup, the minimum phase
voltage becomes more than the setting of ―Upe_VT Normal‖ for a duration
241
supervision
more than 10 sec.
Figure 78 shows logic diagram of VT failure supervision as it is implemented.
Max(Ia,Ib,Ic)>I_VT Fail
A
max{Ua,Ub,Uc}<
Upe_VT Fail N
D
3U0 < (Upe_VT Fail-1)
3U0 >=(Upe_VT Fail-1)

Solid earthed on
Solid earthed off
O
Max{Uab,Ubc,Uca}- A
Min{Uab,Ubc,Uca}> R
Upp_VT Fail
N
D A
N O
D R
Relay Start up
BI_V3P MCB A
Fail 0-1 VT Fail Alarm
N 10S
block report
VT Fail on
D
VT Fail block
min{Ua,Ub,Uc}> A A
Upe_VT Normal N N 500ms
D D
A
3I0>3I02_VT Fail or N O VT Fail
3I2>3I02_VT Fail R unblock
D
A A
N 10S
N
D D
Figure 78 VT fail blocking/unblocking logic
IP1 VT Fail
IP2
IP3
IN
IU1
IU2
IU3
V3P MCB Fail
242
supervision
Signal Description

Signal Description
V3P MCB Fail Three phase VT fail
Signal Description
VT Fail VT Fail
2.4.1 Setting list
Default
Min.
Max. setting
A)
)
current threshold of PT failure
I_VT Fail A 0.08Ir 0.2Ir 0.1Ir
detection
Negative sequence/zero
3I02_VT Fail A 0.08Ir 0.2Ir 0.1Ir sequence current threshold of
release blocking due to VT
243
supervision
Default
Min.
Max. setting
A)
)
failure
voltage (phase to earth)

Upe_VT Fail V 7 20 8
threshold of PT failure detection
voltage (phase to phase)
Upp_VT Fail V 10 30 16
threshold of PT failure detection
Upe_VT restore voltage threshold of PT
V 40 65 40
Normal failure detection
VT Fail Check VT 1 0 1
The system is solid
Solid Earthed 1 0 1
earthed system
2.5 Technical data
NOTE:
Table 138 VT secondary circuit supervision technical data
Item Range or value Tolerances

Minimum current 0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A ≤ ±3% setting or ±0.02Ir
Minimum zero or negative 0.08Ir to 0.20Ir, step 0.01A ≤ ±5% setting or ±0.02Ir
sequence current
Maximum phase to earth 7.0V to 20.0V, step 0.01V ≤ ±3% setting or ±1 V
voltage
Maximum phase to phase 10.0V to 30.0V, step 0.01V ≤ ±3% setting or ±1 V
voltage
Normal phase to earth 40.0V to 65.0V, step 0.01V ≤ ±3% setting or ±1 V
voltage
244
Chapter 20 Monitoring
About this chapter

monitoring function.
245
Chapter 20 Mornitoring
1 Check Phase-sequence for voltage and

current
1.1 Introduction
In normal condition of power system, whether AC circuits of three phases are

connected in right sequence or not can be distinguished by phasor
comparison of three phases current and voltage. If they are in abnormal
sequence, ―3Ph SEQ Err‖ will be reported.
2 Check 3I0 polarity
2.1 Introduction
By comparing value and phasor of calculated 3I0 (IA+IB+IC) with that of 3I0
external connected, whether the polarity of external 3I0 is connected in
reverse or not can be differentiated. If it is in reverse, ―3I0 Reverse‖ will be
reported.
3 Check the third harmonic of voltage
3.1 Introduction
If the third harmonic voltage exceeds 4V, ―Harmonic Alarm‖ will be reported
with 10s delay time, but the protection is not blocked.
4 Check auxiliary contact of circuit

breaker
4.1 Introduction
If auxiliary contact of CB indicates that circuit breaker pole is open but at the
246
same time and current is flowing trough corresponding phase, ―CB Open A (B
or C) Err‖ is reported after 2sec delay time..
5 Broken conductor
5.1 Introduction
The system supervises load flow in real time. If negative current is greater than
the setting of ―3I2_Broken Conduct‖, after ―T_Broken Conduct‖, ―BRKN COND
Alarm‖ is reported. The following logic shows the logic diagram of thebroken
conductor.
5.1.1 Logic diagram
BI_PhA CB Open
BI_PhA CB Open O
R
BI_PhA CB Open
A
3I2>3I2_Broken N
Conduct D
A Broken
T_Broken
N Conduct
Conduct
D Broken Conduct Alarm
Trip Off
Func_Broken Conduct on
A Broken
T_Broken
N Conduct Conduct
D Broken Conduct Trip
Trip On
Figure 79 Broken conductor logic
247
IP1 BRKN COND Trip
IP2 BRKN COND Alarm
IP3
PhA CB Open
PhB CB Open
PhC CB Open
Signal Description

Signal Description
PhA CB Open Phase A CB Open

PhB CB Open Phase B CB Open
PhC CB Open Phase C CB Open
Signal Description
BRKN COND Trip BRKN COND trip

BRKN COND Alarm BRKN COND alarm
5.3.1 Setting list
248
Table 142 Broken conductor supervision function setting list
Default
Min. Max.
Uni setting
Setting (Ir:5A/1 (Ir:5A/ Description
t (Ir:5A/1
A) 1A)
A)
nagative sequence current
3I2_Broken
A 0.08Ir 2Ir 2Ir threshold of conduct broken
Conduct
detection
T_Broken time delay of conduct broken
s 0 250 10
Conduct detection
Table 143 Broken conductor supervision binary setting list
Broken Conduct
Func_Broken Conduct 1 0 1
function
Broken Conduct Trip
Broken Conduct Trip 0 0 1
function
5.4 Reports
BRKN COND Trip Broken conductor protection trip
BRKN COND Alarm Broken conductor alarm
6 Fault locator
6.1 Introduction
249
Fault location is a process aimed at locating the occurred fault with the
highest possibly accuracy. A fault locator is mainly the supplementary
protection equipment, which apply the fault location algorithms for estimating
the distance to fault.
IED reports fault location after protection tripping. Fault location is calculated
according fundamental frequency component of the measured voltages and
currents corresponding to the faulty phases. Making use of the fundamental
frequency voltages and currents at the line terminal, together with the line
paramenters appears as the most popular way for detrmining the fault
location.
Additionally, there are some conditions that affect the calculated impedance so
that it is not exactly corresponding to distance of the fault. For example, zero
sequence coupling compensation on parallel transmission lines affects the
fault location calculated by protection relays.Therefore, for parallel
transmission lines, IED need to consider mutual inductance, so it should be
informed about the zero sequence current of the other line, ―IN(mutual)‖ via
analogue module of the equipment (Figure 80).
L1
L2
L3
52 52
CSC-101
IA
IB
IC
IN
IN (M)
Figure 80 Parallel line compensation for fault location
Following equation can be used to determine fault location considering parallel

line and zero sequence compensation.
U A(B,C)
Z=
IA(B,C) +K N 3I0+jK m  IN M
250
Equation 23
where
Z0-Z1
KN =
3Z1
X0M
KM =
X1
Other condition that affect on calculated distance is remote end infeed (Figure
81), which can be suitably compensated in order that fault location can be
calculated as accurate as possible. For this purpose, imaginary part of ZL1, XL1,
is calculated from the following equation. This is done by separating the real
and imaginary parts of the following equation.
U A I m ZL1 +I k R g I
Zm1 = = =ZL1 + K R g eiα
Im Im Im
Equation 24
jX
M N Ik
R e jα
L1 L2 XL1
ZL1
Im g
XM1
Im Ik Rg In
ZM1
Figure 81 Remote end infeed compensation in fault location calculation
251
252
Chapter 21 Station communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the communication possibilities in a

substation automation system.
253
1 Overview
Each IED is provided with a communication interface, enabling it to connect to
one or many substation level systems or equipment.
The following communication protocols are available:
 IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
 60870-5-103 communication protocol
The IED is able to connect to one or more substation level systems or

equipments simultaneously, through the communication ports and supported
protocols.
2 Protocol
2.1 IEC61850-8 communication protocol
IEC 61850-8-1 allows two or more intelligent electronic devices (IEDs) from
one or several vendors to exchange information and to use it in the
performance of their functions and for correct co-operation.
GOOSE (Generic Object Oriented Substation Event), which is a part of IEC

61850-8-1 standard, allows the IEDs to communicate state and control
information amongst themselves, using a publish-subscribe mechanism. That
is, upon detecting an event, the IED(s) use a multi-cast transmission to notify
those devices that have registered to receive the data. An IED can, by
publishing a GOOSE message, report its status. It can also request a control
action to be directed at any device in the network.
2.2 IEC60870-5-103 communication protocol
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a

protection IED communicates with a third party control or monitoring system.
This system must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103
communication messages.
The IEC 60870-5-103 is an unbalanced (master-slave) protocol for coded-bit
254
serial communication exchanging information with a control system. In IEC

terminology a primary station is a master and a secondary station is a slave.
The communication is based on a point-to-point principle. The master must
have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication
messages. For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the
―IEC60870 standard‖ part 5: ―Transmission protocols‖, and to the section 103:
―Companion standard for the informative interface of protection equipment‖.
3 Communication port
3.1 Front communication port
There is a serial RS232 port on the front plate of all IEDs. Through this port,
the IED can be connected to the personal computer for setting, testing, and
configuration using the dedicated Sifang software tool.
3.2 RS485 communication ports
Up to 2 isolated electrical RS485 communication ports are provided to

connect with substation automation system. These two ports can work in
parallel for IEC60870-5-103.
3.3 Ethernet communication ports
Up to 3 electrical or optical Ethernet communication ports are provided to

connect with substation automation system. These two out of three ports can
work in parallel for protocol, IEC61850 or IEC60870-5-103.
4 Typical communication scheme
4.1 Typical substation communication scheme
255
Server or Server or
Work Station 1 Work Station 2
Switch
Work Station 3 Work Station 4
Net 1: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port A
Switch Net 2: IEC61850/IEC103,Ethernet Port B Switch

Switch
Switch
Gateway Switch Gateway

or or
converter converter
Net 4: IEC103, RS485 Port B

Net 3: IEC103, RS485 Port A
Figure 82 Connection example for multi-networks of station automation system
4.2 Typical time synchronizing scheme
All IEDs feature a permanently integrated electrical time synchronization port.

It can be used to feed timing telegrams in IRIG-B or pulse format into the
IEDs via time synchronization receivers. The IED can adapt the second or
minute pulse in the pulse mode automatically.
Meanwhile, SNTP network time synchronization can be applied.
Below figure illustrates the optional time synchronization modes.
SNTP IRIG-B Pulse
Ethernet port IRIG-B port Binary input
Figure 83 Time synchronizing modes
256
5 Technical data
Item Data
Number 1
Connection Isolated, RS232; front panel,
9-pin subminiature connector, for software
tools
Communication speed 9600 baud
Max. length of communication cable 15 m
5.2 RS485 communication port
Item Data
Number 0 to 2
Connection 2-wire connector
Rear port in communication module
Max. length of communication cable 1.0 km
Test voltage 500 V AC against earth
For IEC 60870-5-103 protocol
Communication speed Factory setting 9600 baud,
Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud
5.3 Ethernet communication port
Item Data
Electrical communication port
Number 0 to 3
Connection RJ45 connector
Max. length of communication cable 100m
For IEC 61850 protocol
Communication speed 100 Mbit/s
257
Optical communication port ( optional )
Number 0 to 2
Connection SC connector
Optical cable type Multi-mode
Max. length of communication cable 2.0km
IEC 61850 protocol
5.4 Time synchronization
Item Data
Mode Pulse mode
IRIG-B signal format IRIG-B000
Voltage levels differential input
258
Chapter 22 Remote communication
About this chapter
This chapter describes the remote communication possibilities

applied by protection functions.
259
1 Binary signal transfer

The binary signals can be exchanged through remote communication
channels between the two IEDs on the two end of the transmission line or
cable respectively. This functionality is mainly used for the line Tele-protection
communication schemes, e.g., POTT or PUTT schemes, blocking scheme
and inter trip and so on.
2 Remote communication channel
2.1 Introduction
The IEDs are able to communicate with each other in two types:
Directly fiber-optical cable connection mode at distances up to 100 km
Through the communication converter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface

through the public digital communication network
Because there are up to two selectable fiber-optical remote communication

ports, the IED can work in the redundant communication channel mode, with
advantage of no time-delay channel switch in case of the primary channel
broken
Overhead Line or Cable
Single-mode FO
Length: <60kM or
60~100kM
Channel A
IED IED
260
Figure 84 Single channel, communication through dedicated fiber optical cable
Single-mode FO
Length: <60kM or
60~100kM
Channel A
Channel B
IED IED
Figure 85 Double channels, communication through dedicated fiber optical cable
The link between the IED and a multiplexed communication network is made by dedicated
communication converters (CSC186). They have a fiber-optic interface with 1310 nm and 2
FC connectors to the protection IED. The converter can be set to support an electrical
G703-64 kbit/s or G703-E1 2Mbit/s interface, according the requirement of the multiplexed
communication
network.
G703.5(E1: 2048kbit/s)
G703.1(64kbit/s)
o Digital e
communication
e network o
Communication Communication
IED converter converter IED
261
Figure 86 Single Channel, communication through digital communication network
G703.5(E1: 2048kbit/s)
G703.1(64kbit/s)
Channel A
Digital
o communication e
network o
e
o e
Digital
e communication o
network Communication
IED Communication IED
converter converter
Channel B
Figure 87 Double channels, communication through digital communication network
Single-mode FO
Length: <60kM or
60~100kM
Channel A
o e
Digital
communication
e network o
IED IED
Channel B
G703.5(E1: 2048kbit/s)
G703.1(64kbit/s)
Figure 88 Double channels, one channel through digital communication network, one
channel through dedicated fiber optical cables
3 Technical data
3.1 Fiber optic communication ports
262
Item Data
Number 1 to 2
Fiber optic cable type Single-mode
Optic wavelength 1310nm, when the transmission distance
<60km;
1550nm, when the transmission
distance >60km
Optic received sensitivity -38dBm
Emitter electric level >-8dBm; (the transmission distance <40km)
>-4dBm; (the transmission distance 40～
60km)
>-3dBm; (the transmission distance >60km)
Fiber optic connector type FC, when the transmission distance <60km)
SC, when the transmission distance >60km
Data transmission rate 64 kbit/s, G703;
2,048 kbit/s, G703-E1
Max. transmission distance 100kM
263
264
Chapter 23 Hardware
Chapter 23 Hardware
About this chapter
This chapter describes the IED hardware.
265
Chapter 23 Hardware
1 Introduction
1.1 IED structure
The enclosure for equipment is 19 inches in width and 4U in height according

to IEC 60297-3.
 The equipment is flush mounting with panel cutout and cabinet.
 Connection terminals to other system on the rear.
 The front panel of equipment is aluminium alloy by founding in integer

and overturn downwards. LCD, LED and setting keys are mounted on the
panel. There is a serial interface on the panel suitable for connecting to
PC.
 Draw-out modules for serviceability are fixed by lock component.
 The modules can be combined through the bus on the rear board. Both
the equipment and the other system can be combined through the rear
interfaces.
1.2 IED appearance
Figure 89 Protection IED front view
266
Chapter 23 Hardware
1.3 IED module arrangement
X1 X2 X3 X4 X5 X6 X7 X8 X9 X10
AIM CPU1 CPU2 COM BIM BOM1 BOM2 BOM3 BOM4 PSM
Analogue Input module
Binary output module 1
Power supply module

Spare slot for binary
Binary input module
Communication
output module
CPU module 1
CPU module 2
module
Figure 90 Module arrangement （front view, when open the front panel）
1.4 The rear view of the protection IED
Test port For BIM and BOM Ethernet ports Fiber Optical
ports
X10 X9 X8 X7 X6 X5 X4 X3 X2 X1
PSM COM AIM
Figure 91 Rear view of the protection IED
267
Chapter 23 Hardware
2 Local human-machine interface

Setting operation and interrogation of numerical protection systems can be
carried out via the integrated membrane keyboard and display panel located
on the front plate. All the necessary operating parameters can be entered and
all the information can be read out from here,e.g. display, main menu,
debugging menu. Operation is, additionally, possible via interface socket by
means of a personal computer or similar.
2.1 Human machine interface
Front panel adopts little arc streamline and beelines sculpt, and function keys
for MMI are reasonably distributed in faceplate. Panel layout is shown as
Figure 92.
1
5
4
6 7
3 8
Figure 92 Front panel layout with 8 LEDs
268
Chapter 23 Hardware
1
5
4
6 7
3 8
Figure 93 Front panel layout with 20 LEDs
1. Liquid crystal display (LCD)
2. LEDs
3. Shortcut function keys
4. Arrow keys
5. Reset key
6. Quit key
7. Set key
8. RS232 communication port
2.2 LCD
The member of keyboard and display panel is externally arranged similar to a

pocked calculator.
2.3 Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the
same look and feel in all IEDs in the CSC series. LCD screens and other
details may differ but the way the keys function is identical. The keys used to
269
Chapter 23 Hardware
operate the IED are described below.
Table 146 function of keys of the keypad
Key function
SET SET key:
Enters main menu or sub-menu, and confirms the setting changes
QUIT QUIT key:

 Navigates backward the upper menu.
 Cancels current operation and navigates backward the upper
menu.
 Returns normal rolling display mode
 Locks and unlocks current display in the normal scrolling display
mode; (the locked display mode is indicated by a key type icon
on the upright corner of LCD.)
Right arrow key:
 Moves right in menu.
Left arrow key:
 Moves left in menu.
Up arrow key:
 Moves up in menu
 Page up between screens
 Increases value of setting.
Down arrow key
 Moves down in menu
 Page down between screens
 Decreases the value of setting.
RESET key:
 Reset LEDs
 Return to normal scrolling display mode directly
RESET
2.4 Shortcut keys and functional keys
The shortcut keys and functional keys are below the LCD on the front panel. These
keys are designated to execute the frequent menu operations for user’s convenience.
The keys used to operate the IED are described below.
Table 147 function of Shortcut keys and functional keys
Key function
F1 Reserved
F2 Reserved
270
Chapter 23 Hardware
F3 Reserved
F4 Reserved
+ Plus key:
Switch next setting group forward as active setting group， meaning
the number of setting group plus one.

_ Minus key
Switch next setting group backward as active setting group ,
meaning the number of setting group subtracted one.
2.5 LED
The definitions of the LEDs are fixed and described below for 8 LEDs.
Table 148 Definition of 8 LEDs
No LED Color Description
Steady lighting: Operation normally

1 Run Green
Flashing: IED startup
Steady lighting: Alarm II, meaning abnormal situation,

only the faulty function is out of service. Power supply
for tripping output is not blocked.
8 Alarm Red
Flashing: Alarm I, meaning severe internal fault, all
protections are out of service. And power supply for
tripping outputs is blocked as well.
The definitions of the LEDs are fixed and described below for 20 LEDs.
Table 149 Definition of 20 LEDs
Steady lighting: Operation normally

1 Run Green
Flashing: IED startup
Steady lighting: Alarm II, meaning abnormal situation,

only the faulty function is out of service. Power supply
11 Alarm Red for tripping output is not blocked.
Flashing: Alarm I, meaning severe internal fault, all
271
Chapter 23 Hardware
protections are out of service. And power supply for

tripping outputs is blocked as well.
The other LEDs which are not described above can be configured.
There is a serial RS232 port on the front plate of all the IEDs. Through this
port, the IED can be connected to the personal computer for setting, testing,
and configuration using the dedicated Sifang software tool.
272
Chapter 23 Hardware
3 Analog input module
3.1 Introduction
The analogue input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers.
There are two types of current transformer: Rated current 5A with linearity
range 50mA～150A and rated current 1A with linearity range 100mA～30A
(please indicate clearly when order the product).
3.2 Terminals of Analogue Input Module (AIM)
b a
b01 a01
b02 a02
b03 a03
b04 a04
b05 a05
b06 a06
b07 a07
b08 a08
b09 a09
b10 a10
b11 a11
b12 a12
Figure 94 Terminals arrangement of AIM E
Table 150 Description of terminals of AIM E
Terminal Analogue Remark
273
Chapter 23 Hardware
Input
a01 IA Star point
b01 I’A
a02 IB Star point
b02 I’B
a03 IC Star point
b03 I’C
a04 I’N
b04 IN Star point
a05 I’NM
b05 INM Star point
a06 Null
b06 Null
a07 Null
b07 Null
a08 Null
b08 Null
a09 Null
b09 Null
a10 U4 Star point
b10 U’4
a11 UB Star point
b11 UC Star point
a12 UA Star point
b12 UN
3.3 Technical data
3.3.1 Internal current transformer
Item Standard Data

Rated current Ir IEC 60255-1 1 or 5 A
Nominal current range 0.05 Ir to 30 Ir
Nominal current range of 0.005 to 1 A
274
Chapter 23 Hardware
sensitive CT
Power consumption (per ≤ 0.1 VA at Ir = 1 A;
phase) ≤ 0.5 VA at Ir = 5 A
≤ 0.5 VA for sensitive CT
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-1 100 Ir for 1 s
IEC 60255-27 4 Ir continuous
Thermal overload capability for IEC 60255-27 100 A for 1 s
sensitive CT DL/T 478-2001 3 A continuous
3.3.2 Internal voltage transformer
Item Standard Data

Rated voltage Vr (ph-ph) IEC 60255-1 100 V /110 V
Nominal range (ph-e) 0.4 V to 120 V
Power consumption at Vr = 110 IEC 60255-27 ≤ 0.1 VA per phase
V DL/T 478-2001
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-27 2 Vr, for 10s
(phase-neutral voltage) DL/T 478-2001 1.5 Vr, continuous
275
Chapter 23 Hardware
4 CPU module
4.1 Introduction
The CPU module handles all protection functions and logic. There are two
CPU modules in the IED, CPU1 and CPU2, with the same software and
hardware. They work in parallel and interlock each other to prevent
maloperation due to the internal faults of one CPU modules.
Moreover, the redundant A/D sampling channels are equipped. By comparing

the data from redundant sampling channels, any sampling data errors and the
channel hardware faults can be detected immediately and the proper alarm
and blocking is initiated in time.
4.2 Communication ports of CPU module (CPU)
RX
Ch A
TX
RX
Ch B
TX
276
Chapter 23 Hardware
Figure 95 Communication ports arrangement of CPU module
Table 151 Definition of communication ports of CPU module
Ports Definition
Ch A RX Remote communication channel

A optical fiber data receiving port
Ch A TX Remote communication channel

A optical fiber data transmitting
port
Ch B RX Remote communication channel

B optical fiber data receiving port
Ch B TX Remote communication channel

B optical fiber data transmitting
port
Note: These ports are optional
277
Chapter 23 Hardware
5 Communication module
5.1 Introduction
The communication module performs communication between the internal

protection system and external equipments such as HMI, engineering
workstation, substation automation system, RTU, etc., to transmit remote
metering, remote signaling, SOE, event reports and record data.
Up to 3 channels isolated electrical or optical Ethernet ports and up to 2

channels RS485 serial communication ports can be provided in
communication module to meet the communication demands of different
substation automation system and RTU at the same time.
The time synchronization port is equipped, which can work in pulse mode or
IRIG-B mode. SNTP mode can be applied through communication port.
In addition, a series printer port is also reserved.
5.2 Substaion communication port
5.2.1 RS232 communication ports
There is a serial RS232 port on the front plate of all the IEDs. Through this
port, the IED can be connected to the personal computer for setting, testing,
and configuration using the dedicated Sifang software tool.
5.2.2 RS485 communication ports
Up to 2 isolated electrical RS485 communication ports are provided to

connect with substation automation system. These two ports can work in
parallel for IEC60870-5-103.
5.2.3 Ethernet communication ports
Up to 3 electrical or optical Ethernet communication ports are provided to

connect with substation automation system. Two out of these three ports can
278
Chapter 23 Hardware
work in parallel for protocol, IEC61850 or IEC60870-5-103.
5.2.4 Time synchronization port
All IEDs feature a permanently integrated electrical time synchronization port.

It can be used to feed timing telegrams in IRIG-B or pulse format into the
IEDs via time synchronization receivers. The IED can adapt the second or
minute pulse in the pulse mode automatically.
Meanwhile, SNTP network time synchronization can also be applied.
5.3 Terminals of Communication Module
01
02 Ethernet port A
03
04
05
06
07 Ethernet port B
08
09
10
11
Ethernet port C
12
13
14
15
16
Figure 96 Terminals arrangement of COM
Table 152 Definition of terminals of COM
Terminal Definition
01 Null
02 Null
03 Null
04 Null
279
Chapter 23 Hardware
05 Optional RS485 port - 2B
06 Optional RS485 port - 2A
07 Optional RS485 port - 1B
08 Optional RS485 port - 1A
09 Time synchronization
10 Time synchronization GND
11 Null
12 Null
13 Null
14 Null
15 Null
16 Null
Ethernet Optional optical fiber or RJ45

Port A port for station automation
system

Port B port for station automation
system

Port C port for station automation
system
5.4 Operating reports
DI Comm Fail DI communication error

DO Comm Fail DO communication error
5.5 Technical data
5.5.1 Front communication port
Item Data
Number 1
280
Chapter 23 Hardware
Connection Isolated, RS232; front panel,

9-pin subminiature connector, for software
tools
Communication speed 9600 baud
Max. length of communication cable 15 m
5.5.2 RS485 communication port
Item Data
Number 0 to 2
Max. length of communication cable 1.0 km
Test voltage 500 V AC against earth
Communication speed Factory setting 9600 baud,
Min. 1200 baud, Max. 19200 baud
5.5.3 Ethernet communication port
Item Data
Electrical communication port
Number 0 to 3
Connection RJ45 connector
Max. length of communication cable 100m
For IEC 61850 protocol
Optical communication port ( optional )
Number 0 to 2
Connection SC connector
Optical cable type Multi-mode
Max. length of communication cable 2.0km
IEC 61850 protocol
281
Chapter 23 Hardware

5.5.4 Time synchronization
Item Data
Mode Pulse mode
IRIG-B signal format IRIG-B000
Voltage levels differential input
282
Chapter 23 Hardware
6 Binary input module
6.1 Introduction
The binary input module is used to connect the input signals and alarm
signals such as the auxiliary contacts of the circuit breaker (CB), etc.
The negative terminal of power supply for BI module, 220V or 110V, should
be connected to the terminal.
6.2 Terminals of Binary Input Module (BIM)
c a
c02 a02
c04 a04
c06 a06
c08 a08
c10 a10
c12 a12
c14 a14
c16 a16
c18 a18
c20 a20
c22 a22
c24 a24
c26 a26
c28 a28
c30 a30
c32 DC - DC - a32
Figure 97: Terminals arrangement of BIM A
283
Chapter 23 Hardware
Table 153 Definition of terminals of BIM A
Terminal Definition Remark
a02 BI1 BI group 1
c02 BI2 BI group 2
a04 BI3 BI group 1
c04 BI4 BI group 2
a06 BI5 BI group 1
c06 BI6 BI group 2
a08 BI7 BI group 1
c08 BI8 BI group 2
a10 BI9 BI group 1
c10 BI10 BI group 2
a12 BI11 BI group 1
c12 BI12 BI group 2
a14 BI13 BI group 1
c14 BI14 BI group 2
a16 BI15 BI group 1
c16 BI16 BI group 2
a18 BI17 BI group 1
c18 BI18 BI group 2
a20 BI19 BI group 1
c20 BI20 BI group 2
a22 BI21 BI group 1
c22 BI22 BI group 2
a24 BI23 BI group 1
c24 BI24 BI group 2
a26 BI25 BI group 1
c26 BI26 BI group 2
a28 BI27 BI group 1
c28 BI28 BI group 2
a30 BI29 BI group 1
c30 BI30 BI group 2
a32 DC - Input Common terminal of BI group 1
c32 DC - Input Common terminal of BI group 2
284
Chapter 23 Hardware
6.3 Technical data
Item Standard Data

Input voltage range IEC60255-1 110/125 V
220/250 V
Threshold1: guarantee IEC60255-1 154V, for 220/250V
operation 77V, for 110V/125V
Threshold2: uncertain IEC60255-1 132V, for 220/250V ;
Response time/reset time IEC60255-1 Software provides de-bounce
time
Power consumption, IEC60255-1 Max. 0.5 W/input, 110V
energized Max. 1 W/input, 220V
285
Chapter 23 Hardware
7 Binary output module
7.1 Introduction
The binary output modules mainly provide tripping output contacts, initiating
output contacts and signaling output contacts. All the tripping output relays
have contacts with a high switching capacity and are blocked by protection
startup elements.
Each output relay can be configured to satisfy the demands of users.
7.2 Terminals of Binary Output Module (BOM)
7.2.1 Binary Output Module A
The module provides 16 output relays for tripping or initiating, with total 16
contacts.
286
Chapter 23 Hardware
R R R R R R R R
1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15
c a
c02 a02
c04 a04
c06 a06
c08 a08
c10 a10
c12 a12
c14 a14
c16 a16
c18 a18
c20 a20
c22 a22
c24 a24
c26 a26
c28 a28
c30 a30
c32 a32
R R R R R R R R
2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16
Figure 98 Terminals arrangement of BOM A
287
Chapter 23 Hardware
Table 154 Definition of terminals of BOM A
Terminal Definition Related relay
a02 Trip contact 1-0 Output relay 1
c02 Trip contact 1-1 Output relay 1
288
Chapter 23 Hardware
7.2.2 Binary Output Module C
The module provides 16 output relays for signal, with total 19 contacts.
R R R R R R R
4 5 1 2 3 6 7
c a
c02 a02
c04 a04
c06 a06
c08 a08
c10 a10
c12 a12
c14 a14
c16 a16
c18 a18
c20 a20
c22 a22
c24 a24
c26 a26
c28 a28
c30 a30
c32 a32
R R R R R R R R R
8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Figure 99 Terminals arrangement of BOM C
Table 155 Definition of terminals of BOM C
Terminal Definition Related relay
a02 Signal 1-0, Common terminal of signal contact group 1
c02 Signal 2-0, Common terminal of signal contact group 2
289
Chapter 23 Hardware
a04 Signal contact 1-1 Output relay 1
c04 Signal contact 2-1 Output relay 1
a10 Signal 3-0, Common terminal of signal contact group 3
c10 Signal 4-0, Common terminal of signal contact group 4
7.3 Technical data
Item Standard Data

Max. system voltage IEC60255-1 250V /~
290
Chapter 23 Hardware
Current carrying capacity IEC60255-1 5 A continuous,

30A，200ms ON, 15s OFF
Making capacity IEC60255-1 1100 W( ) at inductive load
with L/R>40 ms
1000 VA(AC)
Breaking capacity IEC60255-1 220V , 0.15A, at L/R≤40 ms
110V , 0.30A, at L/R≤40 ms
Mechanical endurance, IEC60255-1 50,000,000 cycles (3 Hz
Unloaded switching frequency)
Mechanical endurance, making IEC60255-1 ≥1000 cycles
Mechanical endurance, IEC60255-1 ≥1000 cycles

breaking
Specification state verification IEC60255-1 UL/CSA、TŰV
IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Contact circuit resistance IEC60255-1 30mΩ
measurement IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Open Contact insulation test IEC60255-1 AC1000V 1min
(AC Dielectric strength) IEC60255-27
Maximum temperature of parts IEC60255-1 55℃
and materials
291
Chapter 23 Hardware
8 Power supply module
8.1 Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and
full isolation between the terminal and the battery system. Its power input is
DC 220V or 110V (according to the order code), and its outputs are five
groups of power supply.
(1) ＋24V two groups provided: Power for inputs of the corresponding
binary inputs of the CPU module
(2) ±12V: Power for A/D
(3) + 5V: Power for all micro-chips
8.2 Terminals of Power Supply Module (PSM)
c a
c02 DC 24V + a02
OUTPUTS
c04 a04
c06 a06
c08 a08
DC 24V -
c10 OUTPUTS
a10
c12 a12
c14 a14
c16 a16
c18 a18
c20 AUX.DC + a20

INPUT
c22 a22
c24 a24
c26 AUX. DC - a26
INPUT
c28 a28
c30 a30
c32 a32
Figure 100 Terminals arrangement of PSM
292
Chapter 23 Hardware
Table 156 Definition of terminals of PSM
Terminal Definition
a02 AUX.DC 24V+ output 1

c02 AUX.DC 24V+ output 2
a04 AUX.DC 24V+ output 3
c04 AUX.DC 24V+ output 4
a06 Isolated terminal, not wired
c06 Isolated terminal, not wired
a08 AUX.DC 24V- output 1
c08 AUX.DC 24V- output 2
a14 Alarm contact A1, for AUX.DC power input failure
c14 Alarm contact A0, for AUX.DC power input failure
a16 Alarm contact B1, for AUX.DC power input failure
c16 Alarm contact B0, for AUX.DC power input failure
a20 AUX. power input 1, DC +
c20 AUX. power input 2, DC +
a22 AUX. power input 3, DC +
c22 AUX. power input 4, DC +
a26 AUX. power input 1, DC -
c26 AUX. power input 2, DC -
a28 AUX. power input 3, DC -
c28 AUX. power input 4, DC -
a32 Terminal for earthing
c32 Terminal for earthing
293
Chapter 23 Hardware
8.3 Technical data
Item Standard Data

Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux IEC60255-1 110 to 250V
Permissible tolerance IEC60255-1 ±%20 Uaux
Power consumption at IEC60255-1 ≤ 50 W per power supply
quiescent state module
maximum load module
Inrush Current IEC60255-1 T ≤ 10 ms/I≤ 25 A per power
supply module,
294
Chapter 23 Hardware
9 Techinical data
9.1 Basic data
9.1.1 Frequency
Item Standard Data

Rated system frequency IEC 60255-1 50 Hz or 60Hz
9.1.2 Internal current transformer
Item Standard Data

Rated current Ir IEC 60255-1 1 or 5 A
Nominal current range 0.05 Ir to 30 Ir
Nominal current range of 0.005 to 1 A
sensitive CT
Power consumption (per ≤ 0.1 VA at Ir = 1 A;
phase) ≤ 0.5 VA at Ir = 5 A
≤ 0.5 VA for sensitive CT
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-1 100 Ir for 1 s
IEC 60255-27 4 Ir continuous
Thermal overload capability for IEC 60255-27 100 A for 1 s
sensitive CT DL/T 478-2001 3 A continuous
9.1.3 Internal voltage transformer
Item Standard Data

Rated voltage Vr (ph-ph) IEC 60255-1 100 V /110 V
Nominal range (ph-e) 0.4 V to 120 V
Power consumption at Vr = IEC 60255-27 ≤ 0.1 VA per phase
110 V DL/T 478-2001
Thermal overload capability IEC 60255-27 2 Vr, for 10s
(phase-neutral voltage) DL/T 478-2001 1.5 Vr, continuous
295
Chapter 23 Hardware
9.1.4 Auxiliary voltage
Item Standard Data

Rated auxiliary voltage Uaux IEC60255-1 110 to 250V
Permissible tolerance IEC60255-1 ±%20 Uaux
quiescent state module
maximum load module
Inrush Current IEC60255-1 T ≤ 10 ms/I≤ 25 A per power
supply module,
9.1.5 Binary inputs
Item Standard Data

Input voltage range IEC60255-1 110/125 V
220/250 V
Threshold1: guarantee IEC60255-1 154V, for 220/250V
Threshold2: uncertain IEC60255-1 132V, for 220/250V ;
Response time/reset time IEC60255-1 Software provides de-bounce
time
Power consumption, IEC60255-1 Max. 0.5 W/input, 110V
energized Max. 1 W/input, 220V
9.1.6 Binary outputs
Item Standard Data

Max. system voltage IEC60255-1 250V /~
Current carrying capacity IEC60255-1 5 A continuous,
30A，200ms ON, 15s OFF
Making capacity IEC60255-1 1100 W( ) at inductive load
with L/R>40 ms
1000 VA(AC)
Breaking capacity IEC60255-1 220V , 0.15A, at L/R≤40 ms
110V , 0.30A, at L/R≤40 ms
296
Chapter 23 Hardware
Mechanical endurance, IEC60255-1 50,000,000 cycles (3 Hz

Unloaded switching frequency)
Mechanical endurance, making IEC60255-1 ≥1000 cycles
Mechanical endurance, IEC60255-1 ≥1000 cycles

breaking
Specification state verification IEC60255-1 UL/CSA、TŰV
IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Contact circuit resistance IEC60255-1 30mΩ
measurement IEC60255-23
IEC61810-1
Open Contact insulation test IEC60255-1 AC1000V 1min
(AC Dielectric strength) IEC60255-27
Maximum temperature of parts IEC60255-1 55℃
and materials
9.2 Type tests
9.2.1 Product safety-related tests
Item Standard Data

Over voltage category IEC60255-27 Category III
Pollution degree IEC60255-27 Degree 2
Insulation IEC60255-27 Basic insulation
Degree of protection (IP) IEC60255-27 Front plate: IP40
IEC 60529 Rear, side, top and bottom: IP
30
Power frequency high voltage IEC 60255-5 2KV, 50Hz
withstand test EN 60255-5 2.8kV
ANSI C37.90 between the following circuits:
GB/T 15145-2001  auxiliary power supply
DL/T 478-2001  CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
 case earth
500V, 50Hz
between the following circuits:
297
Chapter 23 Hardware
Item Standard Data

 Communication ports to
case earth
 time synchronization
terminals to case earth
Impulse voltage test IEC60255-5 5kV (1.2/50μs, 0.5J)
IEC 60255-27 If Ui≥63V
EN 60255-5 1kV if Ui<63V
ANSI C37.90 Tested between the following
GB/T 15145-2001 circuits:
DL/T 478-2001  auxiliary power supply
 CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
 case earth
Note: Ui: Rated voltage
Insulation resistance IEC60255-5 ≥ 100 MΩ at 500 V
IEC 60255-27
EN 60255-5
ANSI C37.90
GB/T 15145-2001
DL/T 478-2001
Protective bonding resistance IEC60255-27 ≤ 0.1Ω
Fire withstand/flammability IEC60255-27 Class V2
9.2.2 Electromagnetic immunity tests
Item Standard Data

1 MHz burst immunity test IEC60255-22-1 Class III
IEC60255-26 2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM
IEC61000-4-18 Tested on the following circuits:
EN 60255-22-1  auxiliary power supply
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1  CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
Tested on the following circuits:
 communication ports
Electrostatic discharge IEC 60255-22-2 Level 4
298
Chapter 23 Hardware
Item Standard Data

IEC 61000-4-2 8 kV contact discharge;
EN 60255-22-2 15 kV air gap discharge;
both polarities; 150 pF; Ri = 330
Ω
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 60255-22-3 Frequency sweep:
disturbance test EN 60255-22-3 80 MHz – 1 GHz; 1.4 GHz – 2.7 GHz
spot frequencies:
80 MHz; 160 MHz; 380 MHz;
450 MHz; 900 MHz; 1850 MHz;
2150 MHz
10 V/m
AM, 80%, 1 kHz
Radiated electromagnetic field IEC 60255-22-3 Pulse-modulated
disturbance test EN 60255-22-3 10 V/m, 900 MHz; repetition rate
200 Hz, on duration 50 %
Electric fast transient/burst IEC 60255-22-4, Class A, 4KV
immunity test IEC 61000-4-4 Tested on the following circuits:
EN 60255-22-4  auxiliary power supply
ANSI/IEEE C37.90.1  CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
Class A, 1KV
Surge immunity test IEC 60255-22-5 4.0kV L-E
IEC 61000-4-5 2.0kV L-L
 auxiliary power supply
 CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
500V L-E
Conduct immunity test IEC 60255-22-6 Frequency sweep: 150 kHz – 80
IEC 61000-4-6 MHz
spot frequencies: 27 MHz and
68 MHz
10 V
299
Chapter 23 Hardware
Item Standard Data

AM, 80%, 1 kHz
Power frequency immunity test IEC60255-22-7 Class A
300 V CM
150 V DM
Power frequency magnetic field IEC 61000-4-8 Level 4
test 30 A/m cont. / 300 A/m 1 s to 3 s
100 kHz burst immunity test IEC61000-4-18 2.5 kV CM ; 1 kV DM
 auxiliary power supply
 CT / VT inputs
 binary inputs
 binary outputs
1 kV CM ; 0 kV DM
9.2.3 DC voltage interruption test
Item Standard Data

DC voltage dips IEC 60255-11 100% reduction 20 ms
60% reduction 200 ms
30% reduction 500 ms
DC voltage interruptions IEC 60255-11 100% reduction 5 s
DC voltage ripple IEC 60255-11 15%, twice rated frequency
DC voltage gradual shut–down IEC 60255-11 60 s shut down ramp
/start-up 5 min power off
60 s start-up ramp
DC voltage reverse polarity IEC 60255-11 1 min
9.2.4 Electromagnetic emission test
Item Standard Data

Radiated emission IEC60255-25 30MHz to 1GHz ( IT device may
EN60255-25 up to 5 GHz)
CISPR22
Conducted emission IEC60255-25 0.15MHz to 30MHz
EN60255-25
300
Chapter 23 Hardware
CISPR22
9.2.5 Mechanical tests
Item Standard Data

Sinusoidal Vibration response IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
test EN 60255-21-1 10 Hz to 60 Hz: 0.075 mm
60 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay energized
Sinusoidal Vibration IEC60255-21-1 Class 1
endurance test EN 60255-21-1 10 Hz to 150 Hz: 1 g
20 sweep cycle in each axis
Relay non-energized
Shock response test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
EN 60255-21-2 5 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3
axes
Relay energized
Shock withstand test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
EN 60255-21-2 15 g, 11 ms duration
3 shocks in both directions of 3
axes
Relay non-energized
Bump test IEC60255-21-2 Class 1
10 g, 16 ms duration
1000 shocks in both directions of
3 axes
Relay non-energized
Seismic test IEC60255-21-3 Class 1
X-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 7.5 mm
X-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :2 g
Y-axis 1 Hz to 8/9 Hz: 3.75 mm
Y-axis 8/9 Hz to 35 Hz :1 g
1 sweep cycle in each axis,
Relay energized
9.2.6 Climatic tests
301
Chapter 23 Hardware
Item Standard Data

Cold test - Operation IEC60255-27 -10°C, 16 hours, rated load
IEC60068-2-1
Cold test – Storage IEC60255-27 -25°C, 16 hours
IEC60068-2-1
Dry heat test – Operation [IEC60255-27 +55°C, 16 hours, rated load
IEC60068-2-2
Dry heat test – Storage IEC60255-27 +70°C, 16 hours
IEC60068-2-2
Change of temperature IEC60255-27 Test Nb, figure 2, 5 cycles
IEC60068-2-14 -10°C / +55°C
Damp heat static test IEC60255-27 +40°C, 93% r.h. 10 days, rated
IEC60068-2-78 load
Damp heat cyclic test IEC60255-27 +55°C, 93% r.h. 6 cycles, rated
IEC60068-2-30 load
9.2.7 CE Certificate
Item Data
EN 61000-6-2 and EN61000-6-4 (EMC
EMC Directive
Council Directive 2004/108/EC)
EN 60255-27 (Low-voltage directive 2006/95
Low voltage directive
EC).
9.3 IED design
Item Data
Case size 4U×19inch
Weight ≤ 10kg
302
Chapter 24 Appendix
Chapter 24 Appendix
About this chapter
This chapter describes the appendix.
303
Chapter 24 Appendix
1 General setting list
1.1 Function setting list
Default
Min. Max.
setting
Setting Unit (Ir:5A/ (Ir:5A/ Description
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
Sudden-change current
I_abrupt A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir
threshold of startup element
T_Relay Reset s 0.5 10 1 The reset time of relay
Rated primary voltage (phase
U_Primary kV 30 800 230
to phase)
Rated secondary voltage
U_Secondary V 100 120 100
(phase to phase)
CT_Primary kA 0.05 5 3 Rated primary current
CT_Secondary A 1 5 1 Rated secondary current
current threshold of PT failure
I_VT Fail A 0.08Ir 0.2Ir 0.1Ir
detection
Negative sequence/zero
sequence current threshold of
3I02_VT Fail A 0.08Ir 0.2Ir 0.1Ir
release blocking due to VT
failure
voltage (phase to earth)
Upe_VT Fail V 7 20 8 threshold of PT failure
detection
voltage (phase to phase)
Upp_VT Fail V 10 30 16 threshold of PT failure
detection
restore voltage threshold of PT
Upe_VT Normal V 40 65 40
failure detection
3I0_CT Fail A 0.08Ir 2Ir 0.2Ir threshold of CT failure
detection
nagative sequence current
3I2_Broken
A 0.08Ir 2Ir 2Ir threshold of conduct broken
Conduct
detection
time delay of conduct broken
T_Broken Conduct s 0 250 10
detection
Kx -0.33 8 1 compensation factor of zero
304
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
sequence reactance
Kr -0.33 8 1
sequence resistance
Km -0.33 8 0 sequence mutual inductance
of parallel line
positive reactance of the whole
X_Line Ohm 0.01 600 10
line
positive resistance of the
R_Line Ohm 0.01 600 2
whole line
Line length km 0.1 999 100 Length of line
T_Tele Reversal ms 0 100 40 Time delay of power reserve
3I0_Tele EF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir threshold of tele-protection
based on earth fault protection
time delay of tele-protection
T0_Tele EF s 0.01 10 0.15
current threshold of power
I_PSB A 0.5 20Ir 2Ir
system unstability detection
resistance reach of zone 1 of
0.01/0. 120/60
R1_PE Ohm 1/5 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
X1_PE Ohm 1/5 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
R2_PE Ohm 1.6/8 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
X2_PE Ohm 1.6/8 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
R4_PE Ohm 3/15 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
305
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
0.01/0. 120/60
X4_PE Ohm 3/15 phase to earth distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
resistance reach of extended
0.01/0. 120/60
R1Ext_PE Ohm 1.6/8 zone 1 of phase to earth
05 0
distance protection
reactance reach of extended
0.01/0. 120/60
X1Ext_PE Ohm 1.6/8 zone 1 of phase to earth
05 0
distance protection
delay time of zone 1 of phase
T1_PE s 0 60 0
to earth distance protection
T2_PE s 0 60 0.3
T3_PE s 0 60 0.6
T4_PE s 0 60 0.9
T5_PE s 0 60 1.2
delay time of extended zone 1
T1_Ext_PE s 0 60 0.05 of phase to earth distance
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
R1_PP Ohm 1/5 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
X1_PP Ohm 1/5 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
R2_PP Ohm 1.6/8 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
X2_PP Ohm 1.6/8 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
306
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
R4_PP Ohm 3/15 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
X4_PP Ohm 3/15 phase to phase distance
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
0.01/0. 120/60
05 0
protection
resistance reach of extended
0.01/0. 120/60
R1Ext_PP Ohm 1.6/8 zone 1 of phase to phase
05 0
distance protection
reactance reach of extended
0.01/0. 120/60
X1Ext_PP Ohm 1.6/8 zone 1 of phase to phase
05 0
distance protection
T1_PP s 0 60 0
to phase distance protection
T2_PP s 0 60 0.3
T3_PP s 0 60 0.6
T4_PP s 0 60 0.9
T5_PP s 0 60 1.2
delay time of extended zone 1
T1_Ext_PP s 0 60 0.05 of phase to phase distance
protection
current threshold of manual
I_SOTF_Dist A 0.08Ir 2Ir 0.2Ir switch onto faulty line for
distance+G252
307
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
3I0_Dist_PE A 0.1Ir 2Ir 0.1Ir threshold of phase to earth
distance protection
zero sequence voltage
3U0_Dist_PE V 0.5 60 1 threshold of phase to earth
distance protection
overcurrent stage 1
delay time of overcurrent stage
T_OC1 s 0 60 0.1
1
overcurrent stage 2
delay time of overcurrent stage
T_OC2 s 0 60 0.3
2
No.of inverse time
Curve_OC Inv 1 12 1 characteristic curve of
overcurrent
I_OC Inv A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir
overcurrent
K_OC Inv 0.05 999 1 inverse time characteristic
curve for overcurrent
A_OC Inv s 0 200 0.14 inverse time characteristic
B_OC Inv s 0 60 0 inverse time characteristic
P_OC Inv 0 10 0.02 time characteristic curve for
overcurrent
Angle_OC Degree 0 90 60 operation area of overcurrent
directional element
the maximum current to
release harmornic block
Ratio_I2/I1 0.07 0.5 0.2
delay time of cross block by
T2h_Cross_Blk s 0 60 1
2rd harmormic
308
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
protection stage 1
T_EF1 s 0 60 0.1
protection stage 1
protection stage 2
T_EF2 s 0 60 0.3
protection stage 2
No. of inverse time
Curve_EF Inv 1 12 1 characteristic curve of earth
fault protection
3I0_EF Inv A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir
K_EF Inv 0.05 999 1 inverse time characteristic
curve for earth fault protection
A_EF Inv s 0 200 0.14 inverse time characteristic
B_EF Inv s 0 60 0 inverse time characteristic
P_EF Inv 0 10 0.02 time characteristic curve for
earht fault protection
Angle_EF Degree 0 90 70 operation area of zero
Angle_Neg Degree 50 90 70 operation area of negative
I_Em/BU OC A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir emergency/backup
overcurrent stage 1
delay time of
T_Em/BU OC s 0 60 0.3 emergency/backup
overcurrent stage 1
309
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
No.of inverse time
Curve_Em/BU OC characteristic curve of
1 12 1
Inv emergency/backup
overcurrent
I_Inv_Em/BU OC A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir emergency/backup
overcurrent
K_Em/BU OC Inv 0.05 999 1
overcurrent
A_Em/BU OC Inv s 0 200 0.14
overcurrent
B_Em/BU OC Inv s 0 60 0
overcurrent
P_Em/BU OC Inv 0 10 0.02
emergency/backup
overcurrent
3I0_Em/BU EF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir threshold of earth fault
protection stage 1
T_Em/BU EF s 0 60 0.3
protection stage 1
No. of inverse time
Curve_Em/BU EF characteristic curve of
1 12 1
Inv emergency/backup earth fault
protection
3I0_Inv_Em/BU
A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir emergency/backup earth fault
EF
protection
K_Em/BU EF Inv 0.05 999 1
310
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
A_Em/BU EF Inv s 0 200 0.14
B_Em/BU EF Inv s 0 60 0
P_Em/BU EF Inv 0 10 0.02
emergency/backup earht fault
protection
current threshold of STUB
I_STUB A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir
protection
T_STUB s 0 60 1 delay time of STUB protection
I_SOTF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 2Ir overcurrent element of switch
onto fault protection
delay time of overcurrent
T_OC_SOTF s 0 60 0 element of switch onto fault
protection
zero sequnce current
3I0_SOTF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.5Ir threshold of switch onto fault
protection
delay time of zero sequce
T_EF_SOTF s 0 60 0.1 overcurrent of switch onto fault
protection
current threshold of overload
I_OL Alarm A 0.08Ir 20Ir 2Ir
alarm
T_OL Alarm s 0.1 6000 20 delay time of overload alarm
voltage threshold of
U_OV1 V 40 200 65
overvoltage stage 1
delay time of overvoltage
T_OV1 s 0 60 0.3
stage 1
U_OV2 V 40 200 63
overvoltage stage 2
delay time of overvoltage
T_OV2 s 0 60 0.6
stage 2
Dropout_OV 0.9 0.99 0.95 reset ratio of overvoltage
U_UV1 V 5 150 40 voltage threshold of
311
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
undervoltage stage 1
delay time of undervoltage
T_UV1 s 0 60 0.3
stage 1
U_UV2 V 5 150 45
undervoltage stage 2
delay time of undervoltage
T_UV2 s 0 60 0.6
stage 2
Dropout_UV 1.01 2 1.05 reset ratio of undervoltage
I_UV_Chk A 0.08Ir 2Ir 0.1Ir
undervoltage
I_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 1Ir circuit breaker failure
protection
3I0_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir threshold of circuit breaker
failure protection
3I2_CBF A 0.08Ir 20Ir 0.2Ir threshold of circuit breaker
failure protection
T_CBF1 s 0 32 0 delay time of CBF stage 1
T_CBF2 s 0.1 32 0.2 delay time of CBF stage 2
delay time of three phase
T_CBF 1P Trip 3P s 0.05 32 0.1
tripping of CBF stage 1
protection
protection
delay time of pole discordance
T_PD s 0 60 2
protection
delay time of dead zone
T_Dead Zone s 0 32 1
protection
delay time of shot 1 of single
T_1P AR1 s 0.05 10 0.6
pole reclosing
T_1P AR2 s 0.05 10 0.7
pole reclosing
T_1P AR3 s 0.05 10 0.8
pole reclosing
T_1P AR4 s 0.05 10 0.9 delay time of shot 4 of single
312
Chapter 24 Appendix
Default
Min. Max.
setting
(Ir:5A/1
1A) 1A)
A)
pole reclosing
delay time of shot 1 of three
T_3P AR1 s 0.05 60 1.1
pole reclosing
T_3P AR2 s 0.05 60 1.2
pole reclosing
T_3P AR3 s 0.05 60 1.3
pole reclosing
T_3P AR4 s 0.05 60 1.4
pole reclosing
angle difference threshold of
Angle_Syn Diff Degree 1 80 30
synchronizing
voltage difference threshold of
U_Syn Diff V 1 40 10
synchronizing
frequency difference threshold
Freq_Syn Diff Hz 0.02 2 0.05
of synchronizing
duration of the circuit breaker
T_Action ms 80 500 80 closing
pulse
T_Reclaim s 0.05 60 3 Reclaim time
T_CB Faulty s 0.5 60 1 duration of CB ready
Times_AR 1 4 1 quanty of shots
T_Syn Check s 0 60 0.05 delay time of synchronizing
T_MaxSynExt s 0.05 60 10 duration of quit synchronizing
duration of CB reclosing
T_AR Reset s 0.5 60 3
prepartion
Minimum voltage of
Umin_Syn V 30 65 40
synchronizing
Maximum voltage of
Umax_Energ V 10 50 30
unenergizing checking
1.2 Binary setting list
No Default
Setting Min. Max. Description
setting
1 1: VT on line side; 0: VT on bus
VT_Line 0 1 0
side
2 binary input switch active
BI SetGrp
0 1 0 setting group
Switch
enable(1)/disable(0)
313
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
3 Relay Test
0 1 0 Test mode enable(1)/disable(0)
Mode
4 Blk Remote block remote control
0 1 0
Access enable(1)/disable(0)
5 phase to phase fault initiate
AR Init By 2p 0 1 0 auto recloser
6 three phase fault initiate auto
AR Init By 3p 0 1 1
recloser enable(1)/disable(0)
7 Relay Trip three pole tripping mode
0 1 0
3pole enable(1)/disable(0)
8 VT failure detection
VT Fail 0 1 1
9 Solid Earthed 0 1 1 solid earthed system(1)
10 CT failure detection
CT Fail 0 1 1
11 Func_Broken conduct broken detection
0 1 1
Conduct enable(1)/disable(0)
12 Broken conduct broken tripping
0 1 0
Conduct Trip (1)/alarm (0)
13 weak infeed function
Weak InFeed 0 1 0
14 blocking scheme of
Blocking
0 1 0 tele-protection
Mode
15 PUTT scheme of tele-protection
PUR Mode 0 1 0
16 POTT scheme of tele-protection
POR Mode 0 1 1
17 tele-protection based on earth
Func_Tele
0 1 0 fault protection
EF
18 Inrush block tele-protection
Tele_EF
0 1 0 tele protection based on earth
Inrush Block
fault protection
19 tele-protection based on earth
Tele_EF Init
0 1 0 fault protection initiate recloaser
AR
20 distance zone 1
Func_Z1 0 1 1
314
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
21 distance zone 2
Func_Z2 0 1 1
22 distance zone 3
Func_Z3 0 1 1
23 distance zone 4
Func_Z4 0 1 1
24 distance zone 4 reserve
Reverse_Z4 0 1 0 direction (1)/forward
direction(0)
25 distance zone 5
Func_Z5 0 1 1
26 distance zone 5 reserve
Reverse_Z5 0 1 0 direction (1)/forward
direction(0)
27 distance extended zone 1
Func_Z1Ext 0 1 1
28 power swing element block
Z1_PS
0 1 1 distance zone 1
Blocking
Z2_PS
Blocking
Z3_PS
Blocking
Z4_PS
Blocking
Z5_PS
Blocking
Z1Ext_PS
0 1 1 extended distance zone 1
Blocking
34 distance zone 2 instantaneous
Z2 Speedup 0 1 0 tripping at reclosing onto fault
35 distance zone 3 instantaneous
Z3 Speedup 0 1 0 tripping at reclosing onto fault
315
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
36 Inrush block the zone 2 or/and
Z23 Speedup 3 instantaneous tripping at
0 1 0
Inrush Block recolsing onto fault
37 overcurrent stage 1
Func_OC1 0 1 1
38 overcurrent stage 1 with
OC1
0 1 1 direction element
Direction
39 OC1 Inrush overcurrent stage 1 blcoked by
0 1 1
Block inrush enable(1)/disable(0)
40 overcurrent stage 2
Func_OC2 0 1 1
41 overcurrent stage 2 with
OC2
Direction
42 OC2 Inrush overcurrent stage 2 blcoked by
0 1 1
43 inverse time overcurrent
Func_OC Inv 0 1 1
44 inverse time overcurrent with
OC Inv
Direction
45 inverse time overcurrent
OC Inv
0 1 0 blocked by inrush
Inrush Block
46 earth fault protection stage 1
Func_EF1 0 1 1
EF1
0 1 1 with direction element
Direction
EF1 Inrush
0 1 1 bloced by inrush
Block
Func_EF2 0 1 1
EF2
0 1 1 with direction element
Direction
EF2 Inrush
0 1 1 bloced by inrush
Block
316
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
52 inverse time earth fault
Func_EF Inv 0 1 1
protection enable(1)/disable(0)
EF Inv
0 1 0 protection with direction
Direction
element enable(1)/disable(0)
EF Inv Inrush
0 1 0 protection blocked by inrush
Block
55 negative sequence direction
EF U2/I2 Dir 0 1 0 element for eath fault protection
EF1 Init AR 0 1 0 initiate recloser
EF2 Init AR 0 1 0 initiate recloser
58 1:backup overcurrent enable; 0:
Func_BU OC 0 1 0
emergency overcurrent enable
59 Func_Em/BU emergency overcurrent
0 1 1
OC enable(1)/disable(0)
60 Em/BU OC emergency overcurrent blocked
0 1 0
Inrush Block by inrush enable(1)/disable(0)
61 emergency inverse time
Func_Em/BU
0 1 1 overcurrent
OC Inv
62 Em/BU OC emergency inverse time
Inv Inrush 0 1 0 overcurrent blocked by inrush
Block enable(1)/disable(0)
63 1:backup earth fault protection
Func_BU EF 0 enable;0:emergency earth fault
protection enable
64 Func_Em/BU emergency earth fault
0 1 1
EF protection enable(1)/disable(0)
65 emergency earth fault
Em/BU EF
0 1 0 protection blocked by inrush
Inrush Block
66 emergency inverse time earth
Func_Em/BU
0 1 1 fault protection
EF Inv
67 Em/BU EF emergency inverse time earth
0 1 0
Inv Inrush fault protection blocked by
317
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
68 STUB protection
Func_STUB 0 1 0
69 SOTF protection
Func_SOTF 0 1 1
70 SOTF Inrush SOTF protection blocked by
0 1 1
71 Func_OL 0 1 1 overload enable(1)/disable(0)
72 overvoltage stage 1
Func_OV1 0 1 1
73 overvoltage stage 1 tripping
OV1 Trip 0 1 0
(1)/alarm(0)
74 overvoltage stage 2
Func_OV2 0 1 1
75 overvoltage stage 2 tripping
OV2 Trip 0 1 0
(1)/alarm(0)
76 1: phase to earth voltage
applied by overvoltage;0: phase
OV PE 0 1 1
to phase voltage applied by
overvoltage
77 undervoltage stage 1
Func_UV1 0 1 0
UV1 Trip 0 1 0
tripping(1)/alarm(0)
Func_UV2 0 1 0
UV2 Trip 0 1 0
tripping(1)/alarm(0)
81 1: phase to earth voltage
applied by undervoltage;0:
UV PE 0 1 1
phase to phase voltage applied
by undervoltage
82 all three phase voltage must be
UV Chk All
0 1 0 less than threshold
Phase
83 current threshold for
UV Chk
0 1 0 undervoltage
Current
84 criterion of state of circuit
UV Chk CB 0 1 0 breaker for undervoltage
318
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
85 circuit breaker failure protection
Func_CBF 0 1 1
86 delay time three-pole tripping
CBF 1P Trip
0 1 0 when one pole of circuit breaker
3P
failure enable(1)/disable(0)
87 negative sequence current
criterion and zero sequence
CBF Chk
0 1 1 current criterion for circuit
3I0/3I2
breaker failure protection
88 criterion of state of circuit
CBF Chk CB breaker for circuit breaker
0 1 0
Status failure protection
89 pole discordance protection
Func_PD 0 1 1
90 negative sequence current
criterion and zero sequence
PD Chk
0 1 0 current criterion for pole
3I0/3I2
discordance protection
91 Func_Dead dead zone protection
0 1 1
Zone enable(1)/disable(0)
92 single pole reclosing mode
AR_1p mode 0 1 1
93 three pole reclosing mode
AR_3p mode 0 1 0
94 AR_1p(3p) complicate reclosing mode
0 1 0
mode enable(1)/disable(0)
95 AR_Disable 0 1 0 recloser disable
96 overriding synchronization
AR_Override 0 1 1
97 AR_EnergCh check dead line and live bus
0 1 0
kDLLB enable(1)/disable(0)
98 AR_EnergCh check live line and dead bus
0 1 0
kLLDB enable(1)/disable(0)
99 AR_EnergCh check dead line and dead bus
0 1 0
kDLDB enable(1)/disable(0)
100 AR_Syn check synchronization
0 1 0
check enable(1)/disable(0)
319
Chapter 24 Appendix
No Default
setting
101 1:three phase must be
AR_Chk3PV energized before single pole
0 1 0
ol reclosing;0: recloasing without
any condition
102 three pole tripping when
recoser is blocked after recloser
AR Final Trip 0 1 0
was initiated due to single pole
tripping enable(1)/disable(0)
103 recloser can be initiated by
1P CBOpen single pole tripping due to
0 1 0
Init AR mechanical cause
104 recloser can be initiated by
3P CBOpen three pole tripping due to
0 1 0
Init AR mechanical cause
320
Chapter 24 Appendix
2 General report list

Table 157 event report list
No. Abbr. Meaning

(LCD Display)
1. Relay Startup Protection startup
2. Dist Startup Impedance element startup
3. 3I0 Startup Zero-current startup
4. I_PS Startup current startup for Power swing
5. BI Change Binary input change
6. Zone1 Trip Zone I distance trip
7. Zone2 Trip Zone II distance trip
8. Zone3 Trip Zone III distance trip
9. Zone4 Trip Zone Ⅳ distance trip
10. Zone5 Trip Zone Ⅳ distance trip
11. Zone1Ext Trip Zone 1 Extended distance trip
12. Dist SOTF Ttrip distance relay speed up trip after switching on to fault(SOTF)
13. PSB Dist OPTD Distance operated in power swing
14. Z2 Speedup Trip Z2 Speedup Trip
15. Z3 Speedup Trip Z3 Speedup Trip
16. Trip Blk AR(3T) Permanent trip for 3-ph tripping failure
17. Relay Trip 3P Trip 3 poles
18. 3P Trip(1T_Fail) three phase trip for 1-ph tripping failure
19. Dist Evol Trip Distance zone 1 evolvement trip
20. Fault Location Fault location
21. Impedance_FL Impedance of fault location
22. Tele_DIST_Trip Tele_DIST trip
23. Tele Evol Trip Tele evolvement trip
24. Carr Stop(Dist) Carrier signal stopped for Dist protection
25. Carr Stop(CBO) Carrier signal stopped for CB open
26. Carr Stop(Weak) Carrier signal stopped for weak-infeed end
27. Carr Send(Dist) Carrier signal sent for Dist protection
28. Carr Send(CBO) Carrier signal sent for Dist protection
29. Carr Send(Weak) Carrier signal sent for weak-infeed end
30. Direct Trip Send Direct Trip Send
31. Direct Trip Recv Direct Trip Receive
321
Chapter 24 Appendix
No. Abbr. Meaning

(LCD Display)
32. Carr Send(DEF) Send carrier signal in DEF
33. Tele_DEF_Trip Tele_DEF trip
st
34. EF1 Trip 1 stage EF Trip
nd
35. EF2 Trip 2 stage EF Trip
36. EF Inv Trip Inverse time stage EF Trip
37. EF SOTF Trip Earth Fault relay speed up after SOTF
38. Em/Bu EF Trip Emergency/Backup Earth Fault Trip
39. Em/Bu EFInv Trip Emergency/Backup Earth Fault inverse time Trip
40. OC Startup Overcurrent Startup
st
41. OC1 Trip 1 stage Overcurrent startup
nd
42. OC2 Trip 2 stage Overcurrent startup
43. OC Inv Trip inverse time stage overcurrent Startup
44. OC SOTF Trip Overcurrent relay speed up after SOTF
45. Em/Bu OC Trip Emergency/Backup overcurrent trip
46. Em/Bu OCInv Trip Inverse time stage emergency/Backup overcurrent trip
47. Inrush Blk Inrush blocking
48. STUB Trip STUB trip
st
49. OV1 Trip 1 stage overvoltageStartup
nd
50. OV2 Trip 2 stage overvoltageStartup
st
51. UV1 Trip 1 stage undervoltageStartup
52. UV2 Trip 2nd stage undervoltageStartup
53. CBF StartUp CBF Startup
st
54. CBF1 Trip 1 stage CBF operation
nd
55. CBF2 Trip 2 stage CBF operation
56. CBF 1P Trip 3P three phase trip for single phase CBF
57. PD Startup Phasor disturbance startup
58. PD Trip Phasor disturbance trip
59. Dead Zone Init Dead zone initiate
60. Dead Zone Trip Dead zone trip
61. BRKN COND Trip Broken conductor protection trip
62. 1st Reclose First reclose
63. 2nd Reclose Second reclose
64. 3rd Reclose Third reclose
65. 4th Reclose Fourth reclose
66. 1Ph Trip Init AR Autoreclose by one phase trip
67. 1Ph CBO Init AR Autoreclose by one phase breaker opening
68. 1Ph CBO Blk AR Autoreclose blocked by one phase breaker opening
322
Chapter 24 Appendix
No. Abbr. Meaning

(LCD Display)
69. 3Ph Trip Init AR Autoreclose initiated by three phase trip
70. 3Ph CBO Init AR Autoreclose initiated by three phase breaker opening
71. 3Ph CBO Blk AR Autoreclose blocked by three phase trip
72. Syn Phase Change Synchronizing phase fail
73. AR Block Autoreclose blocked
74. BI MC/AR BLOCK Autoreclose BI blocked
75. Syn Request Synchronizing began
76. AR_EnergChk OK Energing Check ok
77. Syn Failure Synchronizing check failure
78. Syn OK Synchronizing check ok
79. Syn Vdiff fail Voltage difference synchronizing check failed
80. Syn Fdiff fail Frequency difference synchronizing check failed
81. Syn Angdiff fail Angle difference synchronizing check failed
82. EnergChk fail Energizing check failed
83. AR Success Autoreclose success
84. AR Final Trip Final trip for autoreclose
85. AR in progress Autoreclose is in progress
86. AR Failure Autoreclosure failed
87. Relay Reset Relay reset
88. BI SetGroup Mode BI SetGroup Mode
Table 158 alarming report list
Abbr.
No Meaning
(LCD Display)
1 3I0 Imbalance 3I0 imbalance

2 3I0 Reverse 3I0 reverse
3 3Ph Seq Err Three phase sequence error
4 AI Channel Err AI channel error
5 AR Mode Alarm Autoreclosure mode alarm
6 Battery Off Battery Off
7 BI_Init CBF Err CBF initiation BI error
8 BI_V1P_MCB Err V1P_MCB BI alarm
9 BI_V1P_MCB Err V1P_MCB BI alarm
10 BRKN COND Alarm Broken conductor alarm
11 Carr Fail(DEF) Carrier fail in TeleDEF
12 Carr Fail(Dist) Carrier fail in TeleDist
323
Chapter 24 Appendix
Abbr.
No Meaning
(LCD Display)
13 CB Err Blk PD Pole discordance blocked by CB error

14 CT Fail CT fail
15 DI Breakdown DI breakdown
16 DI Check Err DI check error
17 DI Comm Fail DI communication error
18 DI Config Err DI configuration error
19 DI EEPROM Err DI EEPROM error
20 DI Input Err DI input error
21 DO Breakdown Binary output (BO) breakdown
22 DO Comm Fail DO communication error
23 DO Config Err DO configuration error
24 DO EEPROM Err DO EEPROM error
25 DO No Response Binary output (BO) no response
26 EquipPara Err Equipment parameter error
27 FLASH Check Err FLASH check error
28 Func_Dist Blk Distance function blocked by VT fail
29 Func_UV Blk Undervoltage function blocked by VT fail
30 Meas Freq Alarm Measurement Frequency Alarm
31 NO/NC Discord NO/NC discordance
32 OV/UV Trip Fail Overvoltage / Undervoltage Trip Fail
st
33 OV1 Alarm 1 stage overvoltage alarm
nd
34 OV2 Alarm 2 stage overvoltage alarm
35 Overload Overload alarm
36 PD Trip Fail Pole discordance trip fail
37 PhA CB Open Err PhaseA CB position DI error
38 PhB CB Open Err PhaseB CB position DI error
39 PhC CB Open Err PhaseC CB position DI error
40 ROM Verify Err CRC verification for ROM error
41 Sample Err AI sampling data error
42 Set Group Err Pointer of setting group error
43 Setting Err Setting value error
44 Soft Version Err Soft Version error
45 SRAM Check Err SRAM check error
46 SYN Voltage Err Voltage error for synchronizing check
47 Sys Config Err System Configuration Error
48 Tele Mode Alarm Tele Mode Alarm
324
Chapter 24 Appendix
Abbr.
No Meaning
(LCD Display)
49 Test DO Un_reset Test DO unreset

50 Trip Fail Trip fail
rd
51 U_3rd_Harm Alarm 3 harmonic wave too large
st
52 UV1 Alarm 1 stage undervoltage alarm
nd
53 UV2 Alarm 2 stage undervoltage alarm
54 V1P_MCB VT Fail V1P_MCB alarm
55 V3P_MCB VT Fail V3P_MCB alarm
56 VT Fail VT Fail
Table 159 operation report list
Abbr.
No. Meaning
(LCD Display)
1. SwSetGroup OK Successful to switch setting group

2. Write Set OK Successful to write setting values
3. WriteEquipParaOK Successful to write equipment parameter
4. WriteConfig OK Successful to write configuration
5. AdjScale OK Successful to adjust scale of AI
6. ClrConfig OK Successful to clear configuration
7. Cpu Reset CPU reset
8. Reset Config Reset configuration
9. Test BO OK Test BO OK
10. VT Recovery VT recovery
11. AdjDrift OK Successful to adjust zero drift of AI
12. Clear All Rpt OK Clear all report OK
13. MeasFreqOK Measurement frequency OK
14. Test mode On Test mode On
15. Test mode Off Test mode Off
16. Func_VT Fail On VT fail function on
17. Func_VT Fail Off VT fail function off
18. Func_Dist On Distance function on
19. Func_Dist Off Distance function off
20. Func_PSB On PSB function on
21. Func_PSB Off PSB function off
22. Func_TeleDist On TeleDist function on
23. FuncTeleDist Off TeleDist function off
325
Chapter 24 Appendix
Abbr.
No. Meaning
(LCD Display)
24. Func_Tele_DEF On TeleDEF function on

25. Func_TeleDEF Off TeleDEF function off
26. Func_EF On EF function on
27. Func_EF Off EF function off
28. Func_EF Inv On Inverse stage EF function on
29. Func_EF Inv Off Inverse stage EF function off
30. Func_OC On OC function on
31. Func_OC Off OC function off
32. Func_OC Inv On Inverse stage OC function on
33. Func_OC Inv Off Inverse stage OC function off
34. Func_BU_OC On BU OC function on
35. Func_BU_OC Off BU OC function off
36. Func_BU_EF On BU EF function on
37. Func_BU_EF Off BU EF function off
38. Func_STUB On STUB function on
39. Func_STUB Off STUB function off
40. Func_SOTF On SOTF function on
41. Func_SOTF Off SOTF function off
42. Func_OV On OV function on
43. Func_OV Off OV function off
44. Func_UV On UV function on
45. Func_UV Off UV function off
46. Func_AR On AR function on
47. Func_AR Off AR function off
48. AR Syn On Syncronizing function on
49. AR Syn Off Syncronizing function off
50. AR EnergChk On Engergizing check function on
51. AR EnergChk Off Engergizing check function off
52. AR Override On Override function on
53. AR Override Off Override function off
54. BI_AR Off AR off BI
55. Func_CBF On CBF function on
56. Func_CBF Off CBF function off
57. Func_PD On PD function on
58. Func_PD Off PD function off
59. Func_DZ On DZ function on
326
Chapter 24 Appendix
Abbr.
No. Meaning
(LCD Display)
60. Func_DZ Off DZ function off
327
Chapter 24 Appendix
3 Typical connection
A. For one breaker of single or double busbar arrangement
A
B
C
Protection IED
a01
b01 IA
a02
b02 IB
* * * a03
b03 IC
a04
b04 IN
a10
UA
a09
UB
b09
UC
b10
UN
a07
b07 U4
Figure 101 Typical connection diagram for one breaker of single or double busbar
arrangement
328
Chapter 24 Appendix
B. For one and half breaker arrangement

A
B
C
* * *
Protection IED
* * * a01
b01 IA
a02
b02 IB
a03
b03 IC
a04
b04 IN
a10
UA
a09
UB
b09
UC
b10
UN
a07
b07 U4
A
B
C
Figure 102 Typical connection diagram for one and half breaker arrangement
329
Chapter 24 Appendix
C. For parallel lines

A
B
C
Protection IED
a01
b01 IA
a02
b02 IB
* * * a03 * * *
b03 IC
a04
b04 IN
a10
UA
a09
UB
b09
UC
b10
UN
a07
b07 U4
a05
b05 INM
Figure 103 Typical connection diagram for parallel lines
330
Chapter 24 Appendix
4 Glossary
AC Alternating current
A/D converter Analog to digital converter
ADBS Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BS British standard
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CB Circuit breaker
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body within the
International Telecommunications Union.
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both
directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US developer
of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
331
Chapter 24 Appendix
DBLL Dead bus live line

DC Direct current
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std. 1379-2000
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DTT Direct transfer trip scheme
EIA Electronic Industries Association
EMC Electro magnetic compatibility
EMF Electro motive force
EMI Electro magnetic interference
EnFP End fault protection
ESD Electrostatic discharge
FOX 20 Modular 20 channel telecommunication system for speech, data
and protection signals
FOX 512/515 Access multiplexer
FOX 6Plus Compact, time-division multiplexer for the transmission of up to
seven duplex channels of digital data over optical fibers
G.703 Electrical and functional description for digital lines used by local
telephone companies. Can be transported over balanced and
unbalanced lines
GI General interrogation command
GIS Gas insulated switchgear
GOOSE Generic object oriented substation event
GPS Global positioning system
GSM GPS time synchronization module
HDLC protocol High level data link control, protocol based on the HDLC standard
HFBR connector Plastic fiber connector
type
HMI Human machine interface
HV High voltage
HVDC High voltage direct current
IEC International Electrical Committee
IEC 60044-6 IEC Standard, Instrument transformers ?Part 6: Requirements for
protective current transformers for transient performance
IEC 60870-5-103 Communication standard for protective equipment. A serial
master/slave protocol for point-to-point communication
IEC 61850 Substation Automation communication standard
IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
IEEE 802.12 A network technology standard that provides 100 Mbits/s on
twisted-pair or optical fiber cable
IEEE P1386.1 PCI Mezzanine card (PMC) standard for local bus modules.
332
Chapter 24 Appendix
References the CMC (IEEE P1386, also known as Common

mezzanine card) standard for the mechanics and the PCI
specifications from the PCI SIG (Special Interest Group) for the
electrical EMF Electro Motive Force.
IED Intelligent electronic device
I-GIS Intelligent gas insulated switchgear
IOM Binary input/output module
Instance When several occurrences of the same function are available
in the IED they are referred to as instances of that function. One
instance of a function is identical to another of the same
kind but will have a different number in the IED user
interfaces. The word instance is sometimes defined as an item
of information that is representative of a type. In the same way an
instance of a function in the IED is representative of a type of
function.
IP 1. Internet protocol. The network layer for the TCP/IP protocol
suite widely used on Ethernet networks. IP is a connectionless,
best-effort packet switching protocol. It provides packet routing,
fragmentation and re-assembly through the data link layer.
2. Ingression protection according to IEC standard
IP 20 Ingression protection, according to IEC standard, level 20
IRIG-B: InterRange Instrumentation Group Time code format B, standard
200
ITU International Telecommunications Union
LAN Local area network
LCD Liquid crystal display
LED Light emitting diode
MCB Miniature circuit breaker
MCM Mezzanine carrier module
MVB Multifunction vehicle bus. Standardized serial bus originally
developed for use in trains.
NCC National Control Centre
OC Overcurrent
OEM Optical ethernet module
OV Over voltage
Overreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example a distance relay is over-reaching when the
impedance presented to it is smaller than the apparent impedance
to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set reach. The
relay ―ees‖ the fault but perhaps it should not have seen it.
POTT Permissive overreach transfer trip
Process bus Bus or LAN used at the process level, that is, in near proximity to
333
Chapter 24 Appendix
the measured and/or controlled components

PSM Power supply module
PT ratio Potential transformer or voltage transformer ratio
PUTT Permissive underreach transfer trip
RFPP Resistance for phase-to-phase faults
RFPE Resistance for phase-to-earth faults
RMS value Root mean square value
RS422 A balanced serial interface for the transmission of digital data in
point-to-point connections
RS485 Serial link according to EIA standard RS485
RTC Real time clock
RTU Remote terminal unit
SA Substation Automation
SC Switch or push-button to close
SCS Station control system
SMS Station monitoring system
SNTP Simple network time protocol ?is used to synchronize computer
clocks on local area networks. This reduces the requirement to
have accurate hardware clocks in every embedded system in a
network. Each embedded node can instead synchronize with a
remote clock, providing the required accuracy.
Starpoint Neutral point of transformer or generator
TCP Transmission control protocol. The most common transport layer
protocol used on Ethernet and the Internet.
TCP/IP Transmission control protocol over Internet Protocol. The de facto
standard Ethernet protocols incorporated into 4.2BSD Unix.
TCP/IP was developed by DARPA for internet working
and encompasses both network layer and transport layer
protocols. While TCP and IP specify two protocols at specific
protocol layers, TCP/IP is often used to refer to the entire US
Department of Defense protocol suite based upon these,
including Telnet, FTP, UDP and RDP.
TPZ, TPY, TPX, Current transformer class according to IEC

TPS
Underreach A term used to describe how the relay behaves during a fault
condition. For example a distance relay is under-reaching
when the impedance presented to it is greater than the apparent
impedance to the fault applied to the balance point, i.e. the set
reach. The relay does not ―see‖ the fault but perhaps it should
have seen it. See also Overreach.
U/I-PISA Process interface components that deliver measured voltage
and current values
UTC Coordinated universal time. A coordinated time scale,
334
Chapter 24 Appendix
maintained by the Bureau International des Poids et Mesures

(BIPM), which forms the basis of a coordinated dissemination
of standard frequencies and time signals. UTC is derived from
International Atomic Time (TAI) by the addition of a whole
number of leap seconds" to synchronize it with Universal "
Time 1 (UT1), thus allowing for the eccentricity of the Earths "
orbit, the rotational axis tilt (23.5 degrees), but still showing
the Earths irregular rotation
Coordinated Universal Time is expressed using a 24-hour
clock and uses the Gregorian calendar. It is used for aeroplane
and ship navigation, where it also sometimes known by the
military name, Zulu time". "Zulu" in the phonetic alphabet "
stands for Z" which stands for longitude zero. "
UV Undervoltage
VT Voltage transformer
X.21 A digital signalling interface primarily used for telecom
equipment
3IO Three times zero-sequence current. Often referred to as the
residual or the earth-fault current
3UO Three times the zero sequence voltage. Often referred to as the
residual voltage or the neutral point voltage
335
Chapter 24 Appendix
5 CT requirement
5.1 Overview
In practice, the conventional magnetic- core current transformer (hereinafter

as referred CT) is not able to transform the current signal accurately in whole
fault period of all possible faults because of manufactured cost and
installation space limited. CT Saturation will cause distortion of the current
signal and can result in a failure to operate or cause unwanted operations of
some functions. Although more and more protection IEDs have been
designed to permit CT saturation with maintained correct operation, the
performance of protection IED is still depended on the correct selection of CT.
5.2 Current transformer classification
The conventional CTs are usually manufactured in accordance with the

standard, IEC 60044, ANSI / IEEE C57.13, ANSI / IEEE C37.110 or other
comparable standards, which CTs are specified in different protection class.
Currently, the CT for protection are classified according to functional

performance as follows:
 Class P CT
Accuracy limit defined by composite error with steady symmetric primary

current. No limit for remanent flux.
 Class PR CT
CT with limited remanence factor for which, in some cased, a value of the
secondary loop time constant and/or a limiting value of the winding
resistance may also be specified.
 Class PX CT
Low leakage reactance for which knowledge of the transformer

secondary excitation characteristic, secondary winding resistance,
secondary burden resistance and turns ratio is sufficient to assess its
performance in relation to the protective relay system with which it is to
be used.
 Class TPS CT
Low leakage flux current transient transformer for which performance is
336
Chapter 24 Appendix
defined by the secondary excitation characteristics and turns ratio error

limits. No limit for remanent flux
 Class TPX CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified

transient duty cycle. No limit for remanent flux.
 Class TPY CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous error during specified

transient duty cycle. Remanent flux not to exceed 10% of the saturation
flux..
 Class TPZ CT
Accuracy limit defined by peak instantaneous alternating current

component error during single energization with maximum d.c. offset at
specified secondary loop time constant. No requirements for d.c.
component error limit. Remanent flux to be practically negligible.
 TPE class CT (TPE represents transient protection and electronic type

CT)
5.3 Abbreviations (according to IEC 60044-1, -6, as

defined)
Abbrev. Description
Esl Rated secondary limiting e.m.f
Eal Rated equivalent limiting secondary e.m.f
Ek Rated knee point e.m.f
Uk Knee point voltage (r.m.s.)
Kalf Accuracy limit factor
Kssc Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
K’ssc Effective symmetrical short-circuit current factor
K‖ssc based on different Ipcf
Kpcf Protective checking factor
Ks Specified transient factor
Kx Dimensioning factor
Ktd Transient dimensioning factor
Ipn Rated primary current
Isn Rated secondary current
Ipsc Rated primary short-circuit current
Ipcf protective checking current
Isscmax Maximum symmetrical short-circuit current
Rct Secondary winding d.c. resistance at 75 °C /
167 °F (or other specified temperature)
337
Chapter 24 Appendix
Rb Rated resistive burden

R’b = Rlead + Rrelay = actual connected resistive
burden
Rs Total resistance of the secondary circuit,
inclusive of the secondary winding resistance
corrected to 75℃, unless otherwise specified,
and inclusive of all external burden connected.
Rlead Wire loop resistance
Zbn Rated relay burden
Zb Actual relay burden
Tp Specified primary time constant
Ts Secondary loop time constant
5.4 General current transformer requirements
5.4.1 Protective checking current
The current error of CT should be within the accuracy limit required at

specified fault current.
To verify the CT accuracy performance, Ipcf, primary protective checking

current, should be chosed properly and carefully.
For different protections, Ipcf is the selected fault current in proper fault
position of the corresponding fault, which will flow through the verified CT.
To guarantee the reliability of protection relay, Ipcf should be the maximum

fault current at internal fault. E.g. maximum primary three phase short-circuit
fault current or single phase earth fault current depended on system
sequence impedance, in different positions.
Moreover, to guarantee the security of protection relay, Ipcf should be the

maximum fault current at external fault.
Last but not least, Ipcf calculation should be based on the future possible
system power capacity
Kpcf, protective checking factor, is always used to verified the CT

performance
To reduce the influence of transient state, Kalf, Accuracy limit factor of CT,
should be larger than the following requirement
338
Chapter 24 Appendix
Ks, Specified transient factor, should be decided based on actual operation

state and operation experiences by user.
5.4.2 CT class
The selected CT should guarantee that the error is within the required
accuracy limit at steady symmetric short circuit current. The influence of short
circuit current DC component and remanence should be considered, based
on extent of system transient influence, protection function characteristic,
consequence of transient saturation and actual operating experience. To fulfill
the requirement on a specified time to saturation, the rated equivalent
secondary e.m.f of CTs must higher than the required maximum equivalent
secondary e.m.f that is calculated based on actual application.
For the CTs applied to transmission line protection, transformer differential

protection with 330kV voltage level and above, and 300MW and above
generator-transformer set differential protection, the power system time
constant is so large that the CT is easy to saturate severely due to system
transient state. To prevent the CT from saturation at actual duty cycle, TP
class CT is preferred.
For TPS class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting e.m.f) is generally
determined as follows:
Where
Ks: Specified transient factor
Kssc: Rated symmetrical short-circuit current factor
For TPX, TPY and TPZ class CT, Eal (rated equivalent secondary limiting
e.m.f) is generally determined as follows:
Where
339
Chapter 24 Appendix
Ktd: Rated transient dimensioning factor
Considering at short circuit current with 100% offset
For C-t-O duty cycle,
t: duration of one duty cycle;
For C-t’-O-tfr-C-t‖-O duty cycle,
t’: duration of first duty cycle;
t‖: duration of second duty cycle;
tfr: duration between two duty cycle;
For the CTs applied to 110 - 220kV voltage level transmission line protection,
110 - 220kV voltage level transformer differential protection, 100-200MW
generator-transformer set differential protection, and large capacity motor
differential protection, the influence of system transient state to CT is so less
that the CT selection is based on system steady fault state mainly, and leave
proper margin to tolerate the negative effect of possible transient state.
Therefore, P, PR, PX class CT can be always applied.
For P class and PR class CT, Esl (the rated secondary limited e.m.f) is
generally determined as follows:
Kalf: Accuracy limit factor
For PX class CT, Ek (rated knee point e.m.f) is generally determined as

follows:
Kx: Demensioning factor
For the CTs applied to protection for110kV voltage level and below system,
the CT should be selected based on system steady fault state condition. P
class CT is always applied.
340
Chapter 24 Appendix
5.4.3 Accuracy class
The CT accuracy class should guarantee that the protection relay applied is
able to operate correctly even at a very sensitive setting, e.g. for a sensitive
residual overcurrent protection. Generally, the current transformer should
have an accuracy class, which have an current error at rated primary current,
that is less than ±1% (e.g. class 5P).
If current transformers with less accuracy are used it is advisable to check the
actual unwanted residual current during the commissioning.
5.4.4 Ratio of CT
The current transformer ratio is mainly selected based on power system data
like e.g. maximum load. However, it should be verified that the current to the
protection is higher than the minimum operating value for all faults that are to
be detected with the selected CT ratio. The minimum operating current is
different for different functions and settable normally. So each function should
be checked separately.
5.4.5 Rated secondary current
There are 2 standard rated secondary currents, 1A or 5A. Generally, 1 A

should be preferred, particularly in HV and EHV stations, to reduce the
burden of the CT secondary circuit. Because 5A rated CTs, i.e. I2R is 25x
compared to only 1x for a 1A CT. However, in some cases to reduce the CT
secondary circuit open voltage, 5A can be applied.
5.4.6 Secondary burden
Too high flux will result in CT saturation. The secondary e.m.f is directly
proportional to linked flux. To feed rated secondary current, CT need to
generate enough secondary e.m.f to feed the secondary burden.
Consequently, Higher secondary burden, need Higher secondary e.m.f, and
then closer to saturation. So the actual secondary burden R’b must be less
than the rated secondary burden Rb of applied CT, presented
Rb > R’b
The CT actual secondary burden R’b consists of wiring loop resistance Rlead
and the actual relay burdens Zb in whole secondary circuit, which is
calculated by following equation
341
Chapter 24 Appendix
R’b = Rlead + Zb
The rated relay burden, Zbn, is calculated as below:
Where
Sr: the burden of IED current input channel per phase, in VA;
For earth faults, the loop includes both phase and neutral wire, normally twice
the resistance of the single secondary wire. For three-phase faults the neutral
current is zero and it is just necessary to consider the resistance up to the
point where the phase wires are connected to the common neutral wire. The
most common practice is to use four wires secondary cables so it normally is
sufficient to consider just a single secondary wire for the three-phase case.
In isolated or high impedance earthed systems the phase-to-earth fault is not

the considered dimensioning case and therefore the resistance of the single
secondary wire always can be used in the calculation, for this case.
5.5 Rated equivalent secondary e.m.f requirements
To guarantee correct operation, the current transformers (CTs) must be able

to correctly reproduce the current for a minimum time before the CT will begin
to saturate.
5.5.1 Line differential protection
The protection is designed to accept CTs with same characteristic but

different CT ratios between two terminals of feeder. The difference of ratio
should not be more than 4 times.
Because the operating characteristic of the line differential protection is based

on the calculation of fundamental component of current, the CT saturation will
result in too much error of the calculation of differential current and reduce the
security of the protection. The CT applied should meet following requirement.
For 330kV and above transmission line protection, TPY CT is preferred. To

guarantee the accuracy, Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:
Where
342
Chapter 24 Appendix
I’pcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency fault current at internal faults

(A)
I”pcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency fault current at external

faults (A)
Considering auto-reclosing operation, Eal should meet the following

requirement, at C-O-C-O duty cycle
Where
K’td: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2.

recommended
To 220kV transmission line protection, Class 5P20 CT is preferred. Because

the system time constant is less relatively, and then DC component is less,
the probability of CT saturation due to through fault current at external fault is
reduced more and more.
Esl can be verified as below:
Where
Ks: Specified transient factor, 2 recommended
Only at special case, e.g. short output feeder of large power plant, the PX
class CT is recommended. Ek should be verified based on below equation.
Where
5.5.2 Transformer differential protection
It is recommended that the CT of each side could be same class and with
same characteristic to guarantee the protection sensitivity.
For the CTs applied to 330kV voltage level and above step-down transformer,
TPY class CT is preferred for each side.
343
Chapter 24 Appendix
For the CTs of high voltage side and middle voltage side, Eal should be
verified at external fault C-O-C-O duty cycle.
For the CT of low voltage side in delta connection, Eal should be verified at
external three phase short circuit fault C-O duty cycle.
Eal must meet the requirement based on following equations:
Where
K’td: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 3

recommended
For 220kV voltage level and below transformer differential protection, P Class,
PR class and PX class is able to be used. Because the system time constant
is less relatively, and then DC component is less, the probability of CT
saturation due to through fault current at external fault is reduced more and
more.
For P Class, PR class CT, Esl can be verified as below:
Where
For PX class CT, Ek can be verified as below:
Where
5.5.3 Busbar differential protection
The busbar differential protection is able to detect CT saturation in extremely

short time and then block protection at external fault. The protection can
discriminate the internal or external fault in 2-3 ms before CT saturation. So
the currents from different class CT of different feeders are permitted to inject
into the protection relay. The rated secondary e.m.f of CTs is verified by
maximum symmetric short circuit current at external fault.
For P Class, PR class CT,
344
Chapter 24 Appendix
For TP class CT,
Ipcf: Maximum primary short circuit current at external faults (A)
5.5.4 Distance protection
For 330kV and above transmission line protection, TPY CT is preferred. To

guarantee the accuracy, Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:
Where
I’pcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at close-in forward

and reverse faults (A)
I”pcf: Maximum primary fundamental frequency current at faults at the end of

zone 1 reach (A)

Where
K’td: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 3.

recommended for line which length is shorter than 50kM, 5 recommended for
line which length is longer than 50kM
To 220kV voltage and below transmission line protection, P Class CT is

preferred, e.g. 5P20.
Where
345
Chapter 24 Appendix
Only at special case, e.g. short output feeder of large power plant, the PX
class CT is recommended. Ek should be verified based on below equation.
Where
5.5.5 Definite time overcurrent protection and earth fault

protection
For TPY CT,
Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:
Where

I”pcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)

Where
K’td: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2

recommended
For P Class and PR class CT,
Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:
346
Chapter 24 Appendix
Where

I”pcf: Maximum applied operating setting value (A)
Where
For PX class CT,
Ek should be verified based on below equation.
Where
5.5.6 Inverse time overcurrent protection and earth fault

protection
For TPY CT,
Kssc should be satisfied following requirement:
Where
I’pcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)
347
Chapter 24 Appendix
requirement, at C-O duty cycle
Where
K’td: Recommended transient dimensioning factor for verification, 1.2

recommended
For P Class and PR class CT,
Kalf should be satisfied following requirement:
Where
I’pcf: Maximum applied primary startup current setting value (A)
Where
For PX class CT,
Ek should be verified based on below equation.
Where
348

CSC-101 Line Protection IED Technical Application Manual - V1.01

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

CSC-101 Line Protection IED Technical Application Manual - V1.01

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CSC-101

Line Protection IED

 Instructions for mounting and commissioning;

 Compilation of the technical specifications;

Protection engineers, commissioning engineers, personnel concerned with

Applicability of this Manual

In case of further questions concerning IED CSC-101 system, please contact

Strictly follow the company and international safety regulations.

Never connect or disconnect wire and/or connector to or from IED

Always connect the IED to protective earth regardless of the

Do not disconnect the secondary connection of current transformer

Do not remove the screw from a powered IED or from an IED

Using the certified conductive bags to transport PCBs (modules).

When replacing modules using a conductive wrist strap connected to

When installing and commissioning, take care to avoid electrical

About this chapter

 Overhead lines and cables up to 1000kV voltage level

 All type of station arrangement, such as 1.5 breakers arrangement,

 Extremely long lines

 Heavily loaded lines

 Communication with station automation system

 Redundant A/D sampling channels and interlocked dual CPU modules

 Single and/or three phase tripping/reclosing

 Current sudden-change startup element

 Zero sequence current startup element

 Over current startup element

 Undervoltage startup element for weak-infeed end of lines

 Three kinds of faulty phase selectors are combined to guarantee the

 Current sudden-change phase selector

 Zero sequence and negative sequence phase selector

 Undervoltage phase selector

 Four kinds of directional elements cooperate each other so as to

 Memory voltage directional element

 Zero sequence component directional element

 Negative sequence component directional element

 Impedance directional element

 Full scheme phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth distance protection with

 Power swing function (68)

 Proven and reliable principle of power swing logic

 Unblock elements during power swing

 All common types of tele-protection communication scheme (85)

 Permissive Underreach Transfer Trip (PUTT) scheme

 Permissive Overreach Transfer Trip (POTT) scheme

 Particular logic for tele-protection communication scheme

 Evolving fault logic

 Sequence tripping logic

 Contacts and/or up to two fiber optical ports can be used for

 A complete protection functions library, include:

 Distance protection with quadrilateral characteristic (21,21N)

 Power swing function (68)

 Tele-protection communication scheme for distance protection

 Tele-protection communication scheme with dedicated earth fault

 Overcurrent protection (50, 51, 67)

 Earth fault protection (50N, 51N, 67N)

 Emergency/backup overcurrent protection (50, 51)

 Emergency/backup earth fault protection (50N, 51N)

 Switch-onto-fault protection (50HS)

 Overload protection (50OL)

 Overvoltage protection (59)

 Undervoltage protection (27)

 Circuit breaker failure protection (50BF)

 Poles discordance protection (50PD)

 Dead zone protection (50SH-Z)